# CommandSection

title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>http-server-upload</B> command typically refers to a lightweight, zero-configuration command-line HTTP server designed for quick setup and operation. Its primary function is to serve static files from a specified directory, making it ideal for local development, rapid prototyping, or temporary file sharing over a network.<BR><BR>A key distinguishing feature, as indicated by its name, is the built-in file upload capability. This often manifests as a web interface (e.g., an HTML form) accessible via a web browser, allowing users to conveniently upload new files to the server's designated directory directly through the browser. Unlike full-fledged web servers such as Apache or Nginx, <B>http-server-upload</B> aims for simplicity, offering a straightforward way to get a web server running with minimal effort. It typically supports options for specifying the listening port, host address, and the root directory for serving content, along with potential features like basic authentication for securing uploads. It's generally not intended for production environments due to its focus on simplicity over advanced features, scalability, or robust security measures.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command typically refers to a third-party utility or script and is not a standard part of most Linux distributions' core utilities.<BR>It is generally not designed for high-performance, large-scale, or production environments due to its simplicity and focus on quick deployment.<BR>Use the upload feature with caution, especially on publicly accessible networks, as improper configuration could lead to unauthorized file uploads or overwrites.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<B>http-server-upload</B> is often installed via package managers specific to programming language ecosystems, such as Node.js's <I>npm</I> (<B>npm install -g http-server-upload</B>) or Python's <I>pip</I> (<B>pip install http-server-upload</B>), or by directly downloading and running a script.


title: TYPICAL USE CASES
content:
This command is commonly used for quickly sharing files on a local network, serving web application builds during development, testing web components locally, or providing a temporary means for others to upload files to your machine without complex server setup.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-fetches <I>N</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Specifies the total number of fetches (requests) to perform. The test will run until <I>N</I> requests have been completed.<br><br><b><b>-rate <I>R</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Defines the target request rate in fetches per second. `http_load` will attempt to maintain this rate.<br><br><b><b>-parallel <I>P</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Sets the number of concurrent connections (clients) to use during the test.<br><br><b><b>-seconds <I>S</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Determines the total duration of the test in seconds. The test will run for <I>S</I> seconds, attempting to make as many fetches as possible within this time.<br><br><b><b>-timeout <I>T</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Sets the connection timeout in seconds. If a connection doesn't receive a response within <I>T</I> seconds, it's considered an error.<br><br><b><b>-proxy <I>host:port</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Specifies an HTTP proxy to use for all requests. Requests will be routed through this proxy.<br><br><b><b>-burst <I>B</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>When used with <I>-rate</I>, this option sends <I>B</I> requests in a rapid burst whenever the rate allows, rather than spreading them evenly.<br><br><b><b>-verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Prints more detailed information during the test execution, including individual response times.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
`http_load` is a lightweight yet powerful command-line utility for benchmarking web servers. It is designed to test a web server's capacity by fetching many HTTP URLs in parallel. Unlike full-fledged browsers, `http_load` focuses purely on the HTTP protocol, making it efficient for generating significant load from a single client machine. It reads a list of URLs from a file and can simulate various load patterns by controlling parameters like the number of fetches, the request rate, or the duration of the test. The tool provides valuable statistics on completion, including the total number of fetches, fetches per second, bytes transferred, bytes per second, and detailed response time metrics (mean, minimum, maximum, standard deviation). This makes `http_load` an excellent choice for quick performance assessments, stress testing, and identifying potential bottlenecks in web server configurations. It's often favored for its simplicity and minimal resource footprint compared to more complex load testing frameworks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>Client-side limitations</I>: The performance of the client machine running `http_load` can become a bottleneck itself, especially for very high loads. Ensure the client has sufficient CPU, memory, and network capacity.<br><br><I>Simple HTTP requests</I>: `http_load` performs simple GET or HEAD requests. It does not support POST requests, form submissions, cookie handling, session management, JavaScript execution, or full page rendering, making it unsuitable for testing complex application logic or user journeys.<br><br><I>Network dependency</I>: Results can be significantly impacted by network latency and bandwidth between the `http_load` client and the target server.<br><br><I>No SSL/TLS support</I>: Older versions of `http_load` may not support HTTPS (SSL/TLS) without specific compilation flags or external libraries. Modern versions often do, but it's worth verifying.


title: URL FILE FORMAT
content:
The <I>url_file</I> is a plain text file where each line contains a single URL that `http_load` should fetch. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' (comments) are ignored. This allows for testing multiple different endpoints or pages on your web server.


title: CONTROLLING TEST DURATION AND LOAD
content:
You typically choose one or two primary options to control the test:<br><ul><li>To run for a specific duration with a fixed number of parallel connections, use `<b>-seconds</b>` and `<b>-parallel</b>`.</li><li>To run for a specific duration with a target request rate, use `<b>-seconds</b>` and `<b>-rate</b>`.</li><li>To perform a fixed number of total fetches, use `<b>-fetches</b>`.</li><li>Using `<b>-fetches</b>` with `<b>-rate</b>` will attempt to perform <I>N</I> fetches at rate <I>R</I>.</li></ul>


title: OUTPUT METRICS EXPLANATION
content:
Upon completion, `http_load` reports several key metrics:<br><ul><li><I>Fetches</I>: Total number of successful requests.</li><li><I>Fetches/sec</I>: Average number of requests completed per second.</li><li><I>Bytes</I>: Total data transferred in bytes.</li><li><I>Bytes/sec</I>: Average data transfer rate in bytes per second.</li><li><I>Response Time</I>: Provides mean, minimum, maximum, and standard deviation for the time taken to receive a full response for each request.</li><li><I>Errors</I>: Counts of different types of errors, such as connection refused, timeouts, or bad responses from the server.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
`http_load` was developed by J. C. "Chris" Hornig as part of his work at the University of Pennsylvania. It emerged as a lightweight, efficient tool for basic web server performance testing in Unix-like environments. While its exact initial release date is not widely publicized, it has been available and used in the open-source community for many years, predating many more complex load testing frameworks. Its enduring popularity stems from its ease of use and effectiveness for quick, focused performance measurements.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>httpflow</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>interface</i>]<br><i>Note: If no interface is specified, <b>httpflow</b> may attempt to listen on all active interfaces or require <b>-i</b> to be provided.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <i>&lt;interface&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network interface to listen on (e.g., <b>eth0</b>, <b>wlan0</b>). This option is often mandatory for live capture.<br><br><b>-p <i>&lt;port&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the HTTP port(s) to monitor. Multiple ports can be specified separated by commas (e.g., <b>80,8080</b>). Defaults typically include standard HTTP/HTTPS ports (80, 443).<br><br><b>-f <i>&lt;BPF_filter&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a BPF (Berkeley Packet Filter) expression to filter packets, similar to <b>tcpdump</b>. This allows for fine-grained control over which packets are processed by <b>httpflow</b> (e.g., <b>host 192.168.1.1</b>).<br><br><b>-r <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads raw packet data from a <b>pcap</b> file (generated by tools like <b>tcpdump</b> or <b>wireshark</b>) instead of a live interface.<br><br><b>-w <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes captured raw packet data to a <b>pcap</b> file. This allows for later analysis with <b>httpflow</b> or other network analysis tools.<br><br><b>-t <i>&lt;timeout&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a timeout for connection inactivity in seconds. Connections inactive for longer than this period will be closed and removed from tracking.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays summary statistics of the captured HTTP flows, often including total requests, errors, and throughput.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operates in quiet mode, suppressing verbose output.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases verbosity of output, showing more detailed information about each HTTP transaction.<br><br><b>-L</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all available network interfaces that <b>httpflow</b> can listen on.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options and usage information.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <b>httpflow</b> utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>httpflow</b> is a specialized Linux command-line utility designed for capturing and analyzing network traffic specifically at the HTTP application layer. Unlike general-purpose packet sniffers like <b>tcpdump</b>, <b>httpflow</b> parses HTTP requests and responses, providing a high-level view of web application communication.<br>It displays details such as HTTP methods (GET, POST), URLs, status codes (200 OK, 404 Not Found), content types, and crucial timing information, including request-to-response latency. This makes <b>httpflow</b> an invaluable tool for debugging web applications, identifying performance bottlenecks, verifying API interactions, and understanding client-server communication patterns.<br>It can operate on live network interfaces or process pre-recorded <b>pcap</b> files, offering flexibility for both real-time diagnostics and post-mortem analysis. Its focus on HTTP semantics simplifies troubleshooting by presenting relevant application-level data without requiring deep packet inspection skills.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires root privileges or appropriate capabilities (e.g., <b>CAP_NET_RAW</b>, <b>CAP_NET_ADMIN</b>) to capture packets from network interfaces.<br><b>httpflow</b> primarily focuses on unencrypted HTTP traffic. For HTTPS/SSL/TLS traffic, it can only see the encrypted tunnel. To analyze HTTPS content, tools like <b>sslsplit</b> or pre-configured `SSLKEYLOGFILE` (for tools like Wireshark) are typically needed, which <b>httpflow</b> does not natively support.<br>High traffic volumes can generate a significant amount of output, potentially overwhelming the terminal or consuming considerable resources.<br>It might not correctly parse highly fragmented or malformed HTTP packets.


title: TYPICAL USAGE
content:
To start monitoring HTTP traffic on a specific interface, use: <br><b>sudo httpflow -i eth0</b><br><br>To monitor HTTP traffic on port 8080 and filter for a specific host: <br><b>sudo httpflow -i eth0 -p 8080 -f 'host 192.168.1.100'</b><br><br>To analyze a previously captured <b>pcap</b> file: <br><b>httpflow -r capture.pcap</b><br><br>To capture live traffic and save it to a <b>pcap</b> file for later analysis: <br><b>sudo httpflow -i eth0 -w live_capture.pcap</b>


title: OUTPUT INTERPRETATION
content:
The output of <b>httpflow</b> typically shows each HTTP request-response pair. For each flow, you'll often see:<br><b>Source and Destination</b>: IP addresses and ports.<br><b>HTTP Method</b>: (e.g., GET, POST).<br><b>Requested URL</b>: The path.<br><b>Status Code</b>: (e.g., 200 OK, 404 Not Found, 500 Internal Server Error).<br><b>Content Type</b>: Of the response.<br><b>Timing Information</b>: Total duration of the request-response cycle, and sometimes individual timings.<br>This structured output helps quickly identify slow requests, failed requests, or unexpected server behavior.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>httpflow</b> utility is typically distributed as part of specialized network monitoring or 'traceflow' toolkits. While not as universally known or long-standing as tools like <b>tcpdump</b>, its development reflects a growing need for application-layer visibility in network diagnostics. It emerged as a simpler, more focused alternative for HTTP-specific analysis, bridging the gap between low-level packet inspection and high-level web server logs. Its design prioritizes ease of use for web developers and network administrators troubleshooting HTTP-based services.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>http</B> [<I>flags</I>] [<I>METHOD</I>] <I>URL</I> [<I>REQUEST_ITEM</I>...] <br><br>Example: <I>http GET example.com/api/users id==1</I> <br>Example: <I>http POST example.com/api/posts title='My Post' body='Content'</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>URL</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The target URL to which the HTTP request will be sent. Can be just a hostname or a full URL with scheme, host, path, and query parameters.<br><br><b><I>METHOD</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The HTTP method (e.g., <B>GET</B>, <B>POST</B>, <B>PUT</B>, <B>DELETE</B>, <B>PATCH</B>, <B>HEAD</B>, <B>OPTIONS</B>). If omitted, <B>GET</B> is assumed unless data items are provided, in which case <B>POST</B> is assumed.<br><br><b><I>REQUEST_ITEM</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more request items that specify headers, data fields, JSON fields, or file uploads. See 'Additional' section for syntax details.<br><br><b>--json, -j</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shorthand for <I>Content-Type: application/json</I> header and ensures outgoing data is serialized as JSON. This is the default if the method is POST/PUT and data items are provided.<br><br><b>--form, -f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shorthand for <I>Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded</I> for form submissions. Data items will be serialized as form fields.<br><br><b>--verbose, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the entire request and response, including headers and body. Useful for debugging.<br><br><b>--headers, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print only the response headers. Useful for quickly inspecting metadata without downloading the body.<br><br><b>--body, -b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print only the response body. Useful for getting just the content without headers.<br><br><b>--check-status, -C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exit with an error code if the response status is 3xx (redirect), 4xx (client error), or 5xx (server error). Useful for scripting.<br><br><b>--auth <I>USER:PASS</I>, -a <I>USER:PASS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide credentials for HTTP Basic or Digest authentication. Example: <B>--auth user:pass</B><br><br><b>--proxy <I>PROTOCOL:PROXY_URL</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a proxy for requests. Example: <B>--proxy http:http://localhost:8080</B><br><br><b>--download, -d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Download the response body to a file. By default, the filename is derived from the URL or <I>Content-Disposition</I> header.<br><br><b>--output <I>FILE</I>, -o <I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write the response body to the specified file instead of standard output.<br><br><b>--session <I>SESSION_NAME</I>, -s <I>SESSION_NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create or reuse a session. Sessions store cookies and auth credentials for subsequent requests. Example: <B>--session mysession</B><br><br><b>--print <I>WHAT</I>, -p <I>WHAT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Controls what parts of the HTTP exchange are printed to standard output. <I>WHAT</I> can be 'H' (request headers), 'B' (request body), 'h' (response headers), 'b' (response body), etc. Example: <B>-p Hhb</B><br><br><b>--ignore-stdin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevent reading data from standard input, even if stdin is not a TTY. Useful when piping to httpie but not intending to send stdin content.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Httpie (pronounced 'aitch-tee-pie') is a <B>command-line HTTP client</B> that makes interacting with web services from the terminal as human-friendly as possible. It is designed for easy API testing, debugging, and general interaction with HTTP servers. <br><br>While <I>curl</I> is a powerful and ubiquitous tool, Httpie aims to provide a more <B>intuitive syntax</B>, <B>colorful and formatted output</B> (especially for JSON), and a focus on <B>developer experience</B>. It simplifies common tasks like sending JSON data, handling authentication, and managing sessions, often requiring fewer flags and a more natural command structure compared to its counterparts. Httpie automatically handles JSON input/output, offers various output options (like showing only headers or body), and supports persistent sessions, making it an excellent choice for modern web development workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While Httpie is user-friendly, it's not as universally pre-installed as <I>curl</I> on most Linux systems, meaning it might require a separate installation. For extremely low-level network debugging or very complex, obscure HTTP features, <I>curl</I> might offer more granular control.


title: REQUEST ITEM SYNTAX
content:
Httpie uses a natural and flexible syntax for specifying request data, headers, and files:<br><ul><li><B>KEY=VALUE</B>: Text data field for <I>application/x-www-form-urlencoded</I> or JSON (default). For JSON, <B>VALUE</B> is interpreted as a string.</li><li><B>KEY:=VALUE</B>: JSON data field where <B>VALUE</B> is interpreted as a raw JSON value (number, boolean, object, array, null).</li><li><B>KEY:VALUE</B>: HTTP header. Example: <B>Authorization:Bearer token</B></li><li><B>KEY=@FILE</B>: File upload field. The content of <B>FILE</B> is read and sent as a file.</li><li><B>KEY:=@FILE</B>: JSON data field whose value is taken from <B>FILE</B>, parsed as JSON.</li><li><B>KEY==VALUE</B>: URL query string parameter. Example: <B>id==1</B> becomes <I>?id=1</I>.</li><li><B>--raw FILE</B>: Send the content of <B>FILE</B> directly as the request body.</li></ul>


title: HTTP METHODS
content:
Httpie automatically infers the HTTP method if not explicitly provided:<br><ul><li>If no data items (<I>REQUEST_ITEM</I>s) are present, the method defaults to <B>GET</B>.</li><li>If data items are present, the method defaults to <B>POST</B>.</li></ul><br>You can always specify the method explicitly before the URL, e.g., <B>http PUT example.com/api/resource</B>.


title: HISTORY
content:
Httpie was created by <B>Jakub Roztocil</B> and first released in <B>2012</B>. Its primary motivation was to provide a more intuitive and aesthetically pleasing command-line interface for interacting with HTTP services, addressing common frustrations users experienced with existing tools like <I>curl</I> when performing API testing and debugging. It quickly gained popularity within the developer community for its simplified syntax, automatic JSON handling, and colorful output, becoming a preferred alternative for many over time.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>httping</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>URL</i><br><br>Examples:<br><i>httping -g -c 10 https://www.google.com</i><br><i>httping -i 1 -s -l http://localhost:8080/health</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>URL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The <i>URL</i> to send HTTP requests to (e.g., <i>https://example.com/</i>).<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>interval</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the <i>interval</i> in seconds between successive HTTP probes. Default is 1 second.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>count</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stop after sending <i>count</i> requests. If not specified, <i>httping</i> continues indefinitely.<br><br><b><b>-g</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use HTTP <i>GET</i> requests instead of the default HEAD requests. Useful when HEAD is not supported or for full content retrieval time.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Follow HTTP <i>redirects</i> (3xx status codes) by following the <i>Location</i> header.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable <i>SSL/TLS</i> (HTTPS) support. This is implied if the URL starts with <i>https://</i>.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>timeout</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a <i>timeout</i> in seconds for each individual request. Requests taking longer than this will be considered failed.<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i>proxy_host:port</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use an <i>HTTP proxy</i> for all requests.<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>user:password</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide <i>HTTP Basic Authentication</i> credentials for the target URL.<br><br><b><b>-h</b> <i>host</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a custom <i>Host</i> header for the HTTP request, useful for virtual hosts.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>port</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the <i>port number</i> to connect to on the target server. Default is 80 for HTTP, 443 for HTTPS.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>httping</i> is a command-line tool akin to <i>ping(8)</i>, but specifically designed for HTTP and HTTPS requests. Instead of sending ICMP echo requests, it dispatches HTTP HEAD or GET requests to a specified <i>URL</i> and meticulously measures the round-trip time. It provides a continuous stream of valuable information including response times, HTTP status codes, and other crucial metrics, making it an indispensable utility for monitoring the availability and performance of web servers.<br><br>It serves as an excellent tool for diagnosing network issues affecting web services, validating SSL/TLS handshake times, or simply keeping a vigilant eye on a website's responsiveness. Unlike general-purpose tools such as <i>curl</i> or <i>wget</i>, <i>httping</i> excels in continuous monitoring and presenting concise summary statistics, mirroring the utility of <i>ping</i> for network connectivity. It is invaluable for system administrators and developers who require quick, insightful health checks into web application performance.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>httping</i> primarily measures the time until the first byte of the response is received (or just headers for HEAD requests). This metric differs from a full page load time, which would encompass rendering and loading all associated assets like images and scripts. It does not execute JavaScript or render HTML.<br><br>While it can follow redirects with the <b>-l</b> option, complex redirect chains or client-side (JavaScript-based) redirects might not be fully handled. Proxy configurations can sometimes be intricate, requiring specific environment variables or explicit <b>-x</b> flags. As a client-side tool, <i>httping</i> provides insights from the perspective of the machine running it and may not reflect the full user experience from diverse geographical locations or varying network conditions.


title: OUTPUT INTERPRETATION
content:
The standard output of <i>httping</i> typically displays the <i>URL</i>, the HTTP status code, and the response time for each request. For example, <i>GET www.example.com:80 (HTTP/1.1 200) 1.23 ms</i>. At the conclusion of the session, it presents a comprehensive summary including minimum, average, maximum, and standard deviation of response times, alongside the 'packet loss' percentage (indicating failed requests).<br><br>An HTTP <i>200 OK</i> status signifies a successful request, while <i>4xx</i> codes denote client-side errors (e.g., <i>404 Not Found</i>) and <i>5xx</i> codes indicate server-side errors (e.g., <i>500 Internal Server Error</i>). The time measurements are critical for assessing web server performance and network latency.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<b>Monitoring Web Server Availability</b>: Continuously check if a website is up and responsive by running <i>httping -i 5 example.com</i>.<br><br><b>Performance Diagnosis</b>: Utilize <i>httping</i> to compare response times from various network locations or under different network conditions to pinpoint performance bottlenecks.<br><br><b>Health Checks in Scripts</b>: Integrate <i>httping -c 1 -L https://your-service/health</i> into automated scripts to perform silent health checks without verbose output.<br><br><b>SSL/TLS Handshake Verification</b>: The <b>-s</b> option allows you to time and verify the SSL/TLS negotiation process, ensuring your HTTPS setup is functioning correctly.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>httping</i> was created by Michiel van der Vlist, with its initial release dating back to approximately 2002. Its development was spurred by the need for a straightforward, <i>ping</i>-like utility tailored specifically for HTTP and HTTPS services. It filled a crucial gap that traditional network diagnostics like <i>ping</i> (ICMP-based) and general-purpose downloaders such as <i>curl</i> and <i>wget</i> did not adequately address for continuous, web-centric monitoring. Over the years, <i>httping</i> has become a go-to tool for quick, at-a-glance health checks of web servers, establishing itself as a fundamental component in network troubleshooting and web server administration toolkits.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<i>ping(8)</i>: Network troubleshooting utility using ICMP echo requests., <i>curl(1)</i>: Command-line tool for transferring data with URL syntax, supporting various protocols including HTTP/HTTPS., <i>wget(1)</i>: Non-interactive network downloader that retrieves files from web servers., <i>ss(8)</i>: Utility to investigate sockets, providing more detailed information than <i>netstat</i>., <i>traceroute(8)</i>: Network diagnostic tool for displaying the route and measuring transit delays of packets across an IP network.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>httprobe</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><br><i>Example Usage:</i><br><b>subfinder -d example.com | httprobe -c 100 -p http:80,https:443,http:8080


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;concurrency&gt;</i>, <b>--concurrency</b> <i>&lt;concurrency&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of concurrent probes. Default is <i>50</i>.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>&lt;timeout&gt;</i>, <b>--timeout</b> <i>&lt;timeout&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the connection timeout in milliseconds. Default is <i>10000</i> (10 seconds).<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>&lt;ports&gt;</i>, <b>--ports</b> <i>&lt;ports&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines custom ports to probe. Format is <i>protocol:port</i>, separated by commas (e.g., <i>http:80,https:443,http:8080</i>). By default, it probes common HTTP/S ports.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--ssl</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Always attempt HTTPS. (Note: This flag is deprecated; it's recommended to use <i>-p https:443</i> instead for explicit control.)<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list-ips</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the IP addresses of discovered hosts instead of their hostnames.<br><br><b><b>-prefer-https</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If both HTTP and HTTPS are found for a host, prefer and output the HTTPS URL.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the probing process.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--resolve</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resolves hostnames to their corresponding IP addresses during probing.<br><br><b><b>-no-redirects</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents <i>httprobe</i> from following HTTP redirects.<br><br><b><b>-tls-grab</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to grab TLS certificate information. (Experimental feature).<br><br><b><b>-stable</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ensures the output is stable (sorted) for consistent results.<br><br><b><b>-sfdc</b>, <b>--skip-ssl-cert-verification</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips SSL certificate verification, useful in environments with self-signed certificates or for avoiding errors on invalid ones.<br><br><b><b>-vhost</b>, <b>--vhost</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a Host header for virtual hosts during probing.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>httprobe</i> is a fast, robust, and highly concurrent tool written in <b>Go</b>, designed to quickly identify active HTTP and HTTPS servers on a given list of domains or IP addresses. It reads a list of targets from <b>stdin</b> (standard input) and outputs the corresponding live URLs to <b>stdout</b> (standard output). This makes it incredibly useful for chaining with other command-line tools in reconnaissance workflows, such as after subdomain enumeration.<br><br>The tool attempts to connect to common HTTP/S ports (e.g., 80, 443, 8080, 8443) by default, and can be configured to probe custom ports. Its primary advantage lies in its speed, achieved through high concurrency, allowing users to efficiently process large lists of hosts to find operational web services. It's an essential utility for penetration testers, bug bounty hunters, and system administrators looking to discover web assets rapidly.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While highly efficient, <i>httprobe</i> can generate a significant amount of network traffic due to its high concurrency. This might be considered noisy on some networks and could potentially trigger intrusion detection systems (IDS) or rate limits. It relies on open ports and standard HTTP/S responses to identify live services, so complex web application firewalls or non-standard server behaviors might lead to false negatives.


title: INPUT AND OUTPUT
content:
<i>httprobe</i> is designed for seamless integration into command-line pipelines. It expects a newline-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to be provided via <b>standard input (stdin)</b> and prints the identified live HTTP/S URLs to <b>standard output (stdout)</b>. This 'Unix philosophy' approach makes it highly versatile for chaining with other tools, such as subdomain enumerators (e.g., <i>subfinder</i>, <i>assetfinder</i>) or port scanners (e.g., <i>naabu</i>).


title: INSTALLATION
content:
The most common way to install <i>httprobe</i> is via <b>Go</b>:<br><i>go install github.com/tomnomnom/httprobe@latest</i><br>Alternatively, pre-compiled binaries are often available for various operating systems on its GitHub repository, making it easy to download and run without a Go environment.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>httprobe</i> was developed by <i>Tom Hudson</i>, better known as <i>tomnomnom</i> in the cybersecurity community. Written in the <b>Go</b> programming language, it quickly gained popularity within the bug bounty and penetration testing communities due to its unparalleled speed and simplicity for identifying live web servers. It has become a staple tool in reconnaissance workflows, often used in conjunction with other open-source intelligence (OSINT) tools for asset discovery. Its design emphasizes performance and ease of integration with command-line pipelines.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b> <<i>interface</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network <i>interface</i> to listen on, e.g., eth0, wlan0.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <<i>filter</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a BPF (Berkeley Packet Filter) <i>filter</i> expression to capture only specific packets.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <<i>file</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the parsed HTTP traffic to the specified output <i>file</i>.<br><br><b><b>-F</b> <<i>format</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output <i>format</i> for file logging. Uses keywords for elements (e.g., common, combined, date time src_ip dst_ip method uri).<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <<i>elements</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a comma-separated list of log <i>elements</i> to include in the output when using <b>-o</b> (e.g., date,time,src_ip,dst_ip,method,uri).<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <<i>level</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the console output log <i>level</i> (0=silent, 1=errors, 2=normal, 3=verbose). Default is 2.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables hostname resolution for IP addresses.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a timestamp to the console output.<br><br><b><b>-b</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints both request and response headers (primarily for debugging).<br><br><b><b>-E</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables the display of empty HTTP Host headers.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents placing the interface into promiscuous mode.<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses non-critical messages, providing quieter operation.<br><br><b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes the <i>User-Agent</i> header in the console output.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes the <i>Referer</i> header in the console output.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes the <i>Cookie</i> header in the console output.<br><br><b><b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes the <i>Set-Cookie</i> header in the console output.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <<i>limit</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exits after processing a specified <i>limit</i> number of HTTP connections.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <<i>seconds</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exits after running for a specified number of <i>seconds</i>.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <<i>user</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Drops privileges to the specified <i>user</i> after opening the network device.<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Excludes URL queries from being displayed in the output.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <<i>file</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads packets from the specified PCAP <i>file</i> instead of a live interface.<br><br><b><b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of <i>httpry</i>.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>httpry</i> is a specialized HTTP packet sniffer and logging tool designed for network analysis and security auditing. It can operate in two primary modes: capturing live HTTP traffic directly from a network interface or processing existing packet capture (PCAP) files. The command parses HTTP/1.x requests and responses, extracting key information such as timestamps, source and destination IPs, HTTP methods, URIs, and various headers like User-Agent, Referer, and Cookies.<br><br>It provides flexible output options, allowing users to display parsed information to the console in real-time or log it to a file with customizable formats and elements. <i>httpry</i> supports Berkeley Packet Filter (BPF) expressions, enabling precise filtering of network traffic to focus only on relevant HTTP streams. This makes it a valuable tool for debugging web applications, monitoring network usage, detecting suspicious HTTP activity, or simply gaining insights into web communications on a network.<br><br>While powerful for HTTP/1.x analysis, it's important to note that <i>httpry</i> does not natively support HTTPS decryption.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><i>httpry</i> primarily supports HTTP/1.x and does not inherently decrypt or parse HTTPS (encrypted) traffic.</li><li>When capturing live network traffic, <i>httpry</i> typically requires root privileges to access network interfaces.</li><li>On very busy networks, <i>httpry</i> can consume significant CPU and memory resources due to packet processing.</li><li>The accuracy of parsing depends on the HTTP traffic conforming to standards; malformed packets might be ignored or misparsed.</li></ul>


title: BPF FILTERING
content:
<i>httpry</i> leverages the powerful Berkeley Packet Filter (BPF) syntax for filtering network traffic. This allows users to specify highly granular rules to capture only HTTP packets from or to specific IP addresses, ports, or networks, significantly reducing the amount of data processed and improving analysis efficiency. For example, 'host 192.168.1.1 and tcp port 80' could be used with the <b>-f</b> option.


title: CUSTOMIZABLE OUTPUT
content:
One of <i>httpry</i>'s strengths is its flexibility in output formatting, particularly when logging to a file using the <b>-o</b> option. Users can define custom log formats using the <b>-e</b> (elements) or <b>-F</b> (format) options. This allows tailoring the output to include only the necessary fields (e.g., date, time, source IP, destination IP, HTTP method, URI, response status) or to match existing log analysis pipelines, making it highly adaptable for various monitoring and auditing purposes.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>httpry</i> was developed as a lightweight, specialized tool to fill a niche between general-purpose packet sniffers (like <i>tcpdump</i>) and full web server logs. It provides real-time, human-readable output focused specifically on HTTP conversations, making it valuable for system administrators, network engineers, and security analysts needing quick insights into web traffic without the overhead of more complex GUI-based tools or deep protocol analysis. Its development focused on efficiency and ease of use for HTTP-specific monitoring tasks.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o, --output <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the output to a specified <<i>file</i>> instead of standard output.<br><br><b>-O, --remote-name</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the output to a file named like the remote URL's filename.<br><br><b>-X, --request <command></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom request method to use (e.g., GET, POST, PUT, DELETE).<br><br><b>-d, --data <data></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sends the specified data in a POST request. Useful for submitting form data to HTTPS endpoints.<br><br><b>-H, --header <header></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes a custom header to the server (e.g., 'Content-Type: application/json').<br><br><b>-u, --user <user:password></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies user and password for server authentication over HTTPS.<br><br><b>-k, --insecure</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows <b>curl</b> to proceed insecurely and skip TLS/SSL certificate verification. <i>Use with caution; primarily for debugging.</i><br><br><b>-L, --location</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Follows HTTP 3xx redirects automatically.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Makes the operation more talkative, showing details like the TLS/SSL handshake process.<br><br><b>--cacert <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the specified CA certificate file to verify the peer's certificate.<br><br><b>--cert <certificate></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the specified client certificate file for client authentication.<br><br><b>--key <key></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the specified private key file for client authentication.<br><br><b>--resolve <host:port:address></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the <i>host:port</i> to resolve to the specified <i>address</i>. Useful for testing against specific IPs or internal hosts.<br><br><b>-I, --head</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fetches the HTTP-header only (HEAD request), useful for checking HTTP status and headers without downloading content.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term "https" refers to the <i>Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure</i>, which is a protocol for secure communication over a computer network, widely used on the internet. It is <b>not a Linux command itself</b>. Instead, Linux systems provide various commands and utilities that <i>utilize</i> or <i>interact with</i> the HTTPS protocol. One of the most common and powerful command-line tools for making requests over HTTPS (among other protocols) is <b>curl</b> (Client for URLs). <br><br><b>curl</b> is a robust utility designed for transferring data to or from a server using various protocols, including HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and more. It is an indispensable tool for scripting network operations, testing web services, and debugging network connectivity, especially concerning secure (HTTPS) communication. It handles SSL/TLS handshakes, certificate validation, and encrypted data transmission, making it the de-facto choice for secure command-line web interactions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <b>curl</b> is incredibly powerful for HTTPS interactions:<br><ul><li>Using <code>-k, --insecure</code> disables critical security checks and should <b>never</b> be used in production environments, as it makes your connection vulnerable to man-in-the-middle attacks. It is strictly for development and debugging purposes.</li><li>Passing sensitive information like passwords directly on the command line can expose them in shell history or process lists. Consider using environment variables or other secure methods.</li><li><b>curl</b> does not render HTML, execute JavaScript, or manage complex browser sessions (e.g., cookies and local storage persistence) like a web browser. It's a data transfer tool, not a headless browser.</li></ul>


title: HTTPS PROTOCOL SUPPORT
content:
<b>curl</b> natively supports the HTTPS protocol by integrating with SSL/TLS libraries (like OpenSSL or LibreSSL). This enables it to automatically handle the secure handshake, certificate validation, and encryption/decryption of data, making it a reliable tool for secure communication with web servers and APIs.


title: DEBUGGING HTTPS ISSUES
content:
For debugging HTTPS connection problems, <b>curl</b> is invaluable. The <code>-v</code> (verbose) option provides detailed insights into the TLS/SSL handshake process, certificate exchange, and HTTP headers, which can help diagnose issues like certificate mismatches, handshake failures, or protocol errors. The <code>-k</code> (insecure) option is useful in controlled debugging environments where self-signed or invalid certificates might be encountered, allowing the connection to proceed despite certificate errors.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>curl</b> was originally released in 1997 as 'httpget', initially created to fetch currency exchange rates. It was renamed to <b>curl</b> in 1998. Over the years, it has evolved significantly, incorporating support for numerous protocols and features, making it one of the most widely used and versatile command-line tools for data transfer across the internet. Its consistent development, active community, and broad adoption have solidified its position as an indispensable utility for developers, system administrators, and anyone working with network protocols, especially HTTP/HTTPS.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>httpx</b> <b>[OPTIONS]</b> <b>-l</b> <i>&lt;TARGETS_FILE&gt;</i><br>or<br><b>echo</b> <i>&lt;URL&gt;</i> | <b>httpx</b> <b>[OPTIONS]</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to a file containing a list of target URLs or hosts to probe.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--url</b> <i>&lt;url&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Single target URL or host to probe.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--ports</b> <i>&lt;ports&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Comma-separated list of ports to probe (e.g., <i>80,443,8080</i>).<br><br><b><b>-sc</b>, <b>--status-code</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display HTTP status code for each target.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--title</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extract and display the HTML title of the page.<br><br><b><b>-td</b>, <b>--tech-detect</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform technology detection to identify web frameworks, libraries, etc.<br><br><b><b>-json</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output results in JSON format for programmatic parsing.<br><br><b><b>-silent</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only results, suppressing informational messages.<br><br><b><b>-timeout</b> <i>&lt;duration&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Timeout for HTTP requests (e.g., <i>5s</i>).<br><br><b><b>-H</b>, <b>--header</b> <i>&lt;header&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a custom HTTP header to requests (e.g., <i>'User-Agent: MyProbe'</i>).<br><br><b><b>-follow-redirects</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Follow HTTP redirects.<br><br><b><b>-ip</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the resolved IP address of the target.<br><br><b><b>-cname</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display CNAME records for the target.<br><br><b><b>-probe</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show probe status for all targets, including those that failed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>httpx</i> is a high-performance HTTP client developed by ProjectDiscovery, specifically designed for rapid web server enumeration and content discovery. It allows security researchers, bug bounty hunters, and system administrators to quickly identify active web services, extract critical information like HTTP status codes, page titles, technology fingerprints, and CNAME/IP details. <br><br>It supports various input methods, including single URLs or lists of targets from a file, and excels in concurrent scanning to process large numbers of targets efficiently. Its flexible output options, including JSON, make it easily integratable into automated workflows for reconnaissance and asset discovery.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While highly efficient for discovery, <i>httpx</i> is primarily a prober, not a vulnerability scanner. It provides information about web services but doesn't actively test for security flaws. <br><br>Using very high concurrency on target systems without prior consent can lead to service disruption or rate limiting. Always ensure responsible and ethical usage.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<i>httpx</i> can be installed via Go (<i>go install -v github.com/projectdiscovery/httpx/cmd/httpx@latest</i>) or by downloading pre-compiled binaries from the ProjectDiscovery GitHub releases page, which are available for various operating systems.


title: COMMON USAGE PATTERNS
content:
<i>httpx</i> is frequently chained with other tools in security workflows. For example, the output of a subdomain enumeration tool (like <i>subfinder</i>) or a port scanner (like <i>naabu</i>) can be piped as input to <i>httpx</i> for efficient HTTP probing. <br><br>Example: <i>subfinder -d example.com | httpx -sc -title -td -json -o results.json</i><br>This command finds subdomains for 'example.com', then pipes them to <i>httpx</i> to get status codes, titles, and tech detection, saving the results in JSON format.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>httpx</i> is an open-source tool developed and maintained by ProjectDiscovery, a collective known for creating a suite of fast, Go-based command-line utilities for security reconnaissance and bug bounty hunting. It was developed to provide a rapid and reliable way to probe HTTP services, often acting as a foundational step before more in-depth analysis with tools like <i>nuclei</i>.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>httrack</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;URL&gt;</i>...<br><b>httrack</b> [<i>project_name</i> [<i>URL</i>]] [<i>options</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-O</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output directory where the mirrored website will be saved. For example, <b>-O /var/www/mirror</b>.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>&lt;N&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the recursion depth level. Defines how many link levels deep <i>HTTrack</i> will follow from the initial URL. A value of 0 means only the initial page.<br><br><b><b>-%L</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables display of the transfer rate (kB/s) during the mirroring process, providing real-time feedback.<br><br><b><b>-%P</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the download progress bar, which is useful for long-running operations.<br><br><b><b>-F</b> <i>&lt;User-Agent&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>User-Agent</i> header for HTTP requests. Can be used to mimic different browsers or to bypass simple bots checks.<br><br><b><b>-s0</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the local file structure creation (<i>'html', 'images'</i> etc.). Files are saved directly into the target directory, preserving the server's directory structure if possible.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates verbose output, showing more detailed information about the download process and encountered issues.<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables quiet mode, suppressing most messages during the download process, useful for scripting.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>&lt;proxy&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures <i>HTTrack</i> to use a proxy server (e.g., <b>-p http://proxy.example.com:8080</b>).<br><br><b><b>-u</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Updates an existing mirror, only downloading new or changed files.<br><br><b><b>--robots=0</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores the <i>robots.txt</i> exclusion rules. Use with caution and respect website policies.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>HTTrack</i> is a powerful, free, and open-source command-line utility for Linux that allows users to download a World Wide Web site from the Internet to a local directory.<br><br>It builds recursively all directories, getting HTML, images, and other files from the server to your computer. <i>HTTrack</i> then arranges the original site's relative link-structure, so you can simply open a page of the mirrored website in your browser and browse the site from link to link, as if you were viewing it online.<br><br>This tool is exceptionally useful for creating offline archives of websites, developing and testing web content locally without an internet connection, or analyzing a site's structure and content. It supports resuming interrupted downloads, updating existing mirrored sites, and applying various filters to control what content is downloaded.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When using <i>HTTrack</i>, it's crucial to be mindful of a few points:<br><br><b>Legal & Ethical Considerations:</b> Always respect the website's <i>robots.txt</i> file and its terms of service. Mirroring a site without permission or excessively burdening a server can be considered unethical or even illegal.<br><br><b>Dynamic Content:</b> <i>HTTrack</i> primarily downloads static content (HTML, CSS, images, JS files). Websites heavily reliant on client-side JavaScript, AJAX, or server-side databases for dynamic content might not function perfectly when mirrored offline.<br><br><b>Resource Consumption:</b> Mirroring large websites can consume significant disk space and bandwidth on both your machine and the target server. Be prepared for potentially long download times and large storage requirements.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<ul><li><b>Website Archiving:</b> Create a persistent offline copy of websites for historical preservation or personal reference.</li><li><b>Offline Browsing:</b> Access web content without an internet connection, ideal for travel or areas with poor connectivity.</li><li><b>Local Development & Testing:</b> Download a site to analyze its structure, extract assets, or perform local testing without hitting the live server.</li><li><b>Data Extraction:</b> Useful for extracting specific data or content types from a website for analysis or redistribution (within legal limits).</li></ul>


title: BEST PRACTICES
content:
<ul><li>Start with a small recursion depth (e.g., <b>-r1</b> or <b>-r2</b>) to understand how the site is mirrored before attempting a full download.</li><li>Always check the website's <i>robots.txt</i> file (e.g., <i>http://example.com/robots.txt</i>) to understand what parts of the site are disallowed for automated crawlers.</li><li>Consider using filters (<b>+<i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i></b>, <b>-<i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i></b>) to include or exclude specific file types or URLs, reducing download size and time.</li><li>Use the <b>-u</b> option to update an existing mirror, rather than redownloading the entire site.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>HTTrack</i> was originally developed by <i>Xavier Roche</i> and first released in 1998. It quickly gained popularity as a robust and reliable tool for website mirroring. Over the years, it has been continually updated and improved, maintaining its status as one of the leading open-source solutions for offline browsing and web archiving. Its development has focused on robustness, flexibility, and adherence to web standards.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I><code>hub [OPTIONS] <COMMAND> [ARGS...]</code><br><code>hub [OPTIONS] <GIT_COMMAND> [ARGS...]</code><br><br><code>hub</code> typically acts as a proxy for <code>git</code>. You can often use it as a direct replacement for <code>git</code> (e.g., <code>hub push</code> instead of <code>git push</code>) where it transparently adds its enhancements. It also introduces its own specific subcommands like <code>hub pull-request</code>, <code>hub fork</code>, or <code>hub browse</code>.</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Show hub's version and exit.</I><br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Show hub's help message or a subcommand's help.</I><br><br><b>[GIT_COMMAND]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Any standard Git command (e.g., <code>clone</code>, <code>remote</code>, <code>pull</code>) that <code>hub</code> intercepts to provide GitHub-specific enhancements, such as automatic URL resolution.</I><br><br><b>[HUB_COMMAND]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>A specific command provided by <code>hub</code> itself (e.g., <code>pull-request</code>, <code>fork</code>, <code>browse</code>, <code>compare</code>) to interact directly with the GitHub API or simplify GitHub-centric workflows.</I><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I><code>hub</code> is a command-line wrapper for Git that makes it significantly easier to interact with GitHub directly from your terminal. Instead of manually constructing complex Git commands with full GitHub URLs, <code>hub</code> simplifies common tasks by providing intelligent shortcuts and GitHub-specific commands. For instance, you can often use <code>hub clone user/repo</code> instead of <code>git clone https://github.com/user/repo.git</code>. It introduces powerful new commands like <code>hub pull-request</code> to create a pull request directly from your current branch, <code>hub fork</code> to fork a repository, or <code>hub browse</code> to open the repository in your web browser. <code>hub</code> aims to extend Git's core capabilities, streamlining your development workflow by deeply integrating with GitHub's functionalities and reducing manual URL construction, making the command-line experience with GitHub intuitive and efficient.</I>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I><code>hub</code> requires a GitHub API token for many of its interactive operations that modify GitHub (e.g., creating pull requests, forking). While still functional, <code>hub</code> has largely been superseded by GitHub's official <code>gh</code> CLI tool, which offers a more comprehensive and actively developed set of features for interacting with GitHub beyond just Git enhancements. Users might find <code>gh</code> to be a more modern and robust option for most GitHub command-line interactions today.</I>


title: HOW IT WORKS
content:
<I><code>hub</code> functions by intercepting calls that would normally go to the <code>git</code> command. When you execute <code>hub <command></code>, <code>hub</code> first checks if <code><command></code> is one of its own built-in commands (like <code>pull-request</code>). If it's not a <code>hub</code>-specific command, it then attempts to pass the command directly to the underlying <code>git</code> binary, often injecting additional arguments or environment variables to enable GitHub-specific behaviors (e.g., automatically resolving repository URLs from shorthand notations). This intelligent interception allows users to configure an alias (e.g., <code>alias git=hub</code> in their shell) to seamlessly use <code>hub</code>'s enhanced capabilities for all their Git commands without changing their habits.</I>


title: HISTORY
content:
<I><code>hub</code> was created by Mislav Marohnić and quickly became a highly popular and indispensable command-line interface for GitHub users. Its development aimed to bridge the usability gap between local Git operations and remote GitHub workflows, making common tasks like creating pull requests, forking repositories, and navigating projects on GitHub significantly simpler directly from the terminal. For many years, it served as the unofficial standard for GitHub command-line interaction. Although still functional, its active development has considerably slowed since the introduction of the official GitHub CLI (<code>gh</code>) by GitHub, which now fulfills the primary role for GitHub command-line tooling.</I>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hub branch</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>&lt;branch-name&gt;</i>] [<i>&lt;start-point&gt;</i>]<br><b>hub branch</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>--delete</b> [<b>-r</b>] <i>&lt;branch-name&gt;</i><br><b>hub branch</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>--move</b> [<i>&lt;old-name&gt;</i>] <i>&lt;new-name&gt;</i><br><b>hub branch</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>--set-upstream</b> [<i>&lt;branch-name&gt;</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>&lt;branch-name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the branch to create, delete, or operate on.<br><br><b><i>&lt;start-point&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A commit or reference (e.g., `HEAD`, `origin/main`) from which to start a new branch.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show both local and remote-tracking branches. When creating a branch, it can also push the branch to the remote, effectively setting it up.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--remotes</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show remote-tracking branches. When used with <b>--delete</b>, it deletes the remote branch.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--delete</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete the specified branch. This operation will fail if the branch has unmerged changes.<br><br><b><b>-D</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force delete the specified branch, even if it has unmerged changes.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--set-upstream</b>, <b>--track</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the upstream branch for the new branch. When creating a branch, it configures it to track the remote branch with the same name.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show more verbose output, including associated pull request numbers when listing branches.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--move</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Move/rename a branch. If <i>&lt;old-name&gt;</i> is omitted, it defaults to the current branch.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>hub branch</b> command extends standard `git branch` functionality by integrating GitHub-specific features, primarily related to pull requests. It allows users to list, create, delete, and manage Git branches with an awareness of their corresponding pull requests on GitHub. <br><br>When listing branches, <b>hub branch</b> can display associated pull request numbers. For creating new branches, it simplifies the workflow by allowing immediate pushing to the remote and even opening a pull request directly from the command line. Deleting branches can also encompass deleting the remote counterpart and closing related pull requests, making it a powerful tool for developers working extensively with GitHub repositories.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>hub branch</b> command relies on the <b>hub</b> tool being installed and properly configured. It functions as an extension to <b>git branch</b>, so basic Git knowledge is beneficial. Its GitHub-specific features (like pull request integration) only work effectively when operating within a repository hosted on GitHub.


title: PULL REQUEST INTEGRATION
content:
One of the key advantages of <b>hub branch</b> is its deep integration with GitHub pull requests. When listing branches with <b>-v</b>, it can display the associated pull request number. When creating a new branch, <b>hub branch</b> can optionally push it to the remote and even open a new pull request for it directly on GitHub, significantly speeding up the development workflow.


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR DIFFERENCES
content:
Unlike plain <b>git branch</b>, <b>hub branch</b> can have different defaults. For instance, when creating a branch and pushing it, <b>hub branch</b> often implicitly sets up upstream tracking or attempts to create the remote branch if it doesn't exist, reducing the need for explicit <b>--set-upstream</b> flags.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>hub</b> project, which includes the <b>branch</b> subcommand, was created to provide a more integrated command-line experience for developers using GitHub. Its development stemmed from the need to bridge the gap between Git's native capabilities and GitHub's rich platform features, particularly for common workflows like creating and managing pull requests. <b>hub branch</b> specifically evolved to streamline operations that traditionally required multiple Git commands and manual interaction with the GitHub web interface.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hub browse</b> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [<I>ARGUMENTS</I>]<br><b>hub browse</b> [-u | --url]<br><b>hub browse</b> [-p | --pull-request [<I>PULL_REQUEST_NUMBER</I>]]<br><b>hub browse</b> [-b | --branch <I>BRANCH</I>]<br><b>hub browse</b> [-f | --file <I>PATH</I>]<br><b>hub browse</b> [-c | --commit <I>COMMIT</I>]<br><b>hub browse</b> [<I>URL</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --url</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the full URL to standard output instead of opening it in a web browser.<br><br><b>-p, --pull-request</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the pull request page. If <I>PULL_REQUEST_NUMBER</I> is provided, opens that specific pull request. If omitted, opens the pull request for the current branch, or the list of all pull requests if no specific PR is associated.<br><br><b>-b, --branch <I>BRANCH</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the GitHub page for the specified <I>BRANCH</I>. Defaults to the current branch if no branch is specified and contextual browsing is active.<br><br><b>-f, --file <I>PATH</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the GitHub page for the specified file or directory <I>PATH</I> within the repository. If <I>PATH</I> is a directory, it opens the tree view.<br><br><b>-c, --commit <I>COMMIT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the GitHub page for the specified <I>COMMIT</I> hash or reference.<br><br><b>-s, --ssh</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates the URL using the SSH-style Git remote (e.g., git@github.com:...). By default, it uses the HTTP/S URL.<br><br><b><I>URL</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directly opens the specified <I>URL</I> in the web browser, bypassing repository context inference.<br><br><b>-c <I>N</I> (with -p)</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When used with <b>-p</b>, opens the specific comment number <I>N</I> on the pull request page.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>hub browse</b> is a powerful command that seamlessly integrates your local Git repository with its corresponding GitHub web interface. Part of the <b>hub</b> toolkit, it extends standard <b>git</b> commands by adding GitHub-specific functionalities, making web browsing of repositories incredibly convenient. Instead of manually navigating to GitHub.com and searching for your project, <b>hub browse</b> intelligently infers the correct URL from your current Git repository's remote configuration. It can open the root of your repository, specific files or directories, branches, commits, or even pull requests directly in your default web browser. This command significantly enhances developer workflow by reducing context switching and manual URL typing, making it a staple for anyone frequently interacting with GitHub repositories. It's particularly useful for quickly sharing links to specific code sections or project pages.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>hub browse</b> relies on the following:<br><br>*   The <b>hub</b> command-line tool must be installed and accessible in your system's PATH.<br>*   Your local Git repository must have a configured remote pointing to a GitHub repository. It primarily infers context from the <i>origin</i> remote, but can often work with others if they are GitHub-hosted.<br>*   Your operating system must have a default web browser configured to handle HTTP/S URLs.<br>*   It assumes a typical GitHub URL structure. While <b>hub</b> is robust, highly customized GitHub Enterprise instances might require additional configuration.


title: EXAMPLES
content:
Here are some common usage examples for <b>hub browse</b>:<br><br><b>Open repository root:</b><br><b>hub browse</b><br><br><b>Open current branch's pull request:</b><br><b>hub browse -p</b><br><br><b>Open specific pull request (e.g., PR #123):</b><br><b>hub browse -p 123</b><br><br><b>Open a file in the current directory:</b><br><b>hub browse -f README.md</b><br><br><b>Open a file in a subdirectory:</b><br><b>hub browse -f src/main.go</b><br><br><b>Open a specific branch:</b><br><b>hub browse -b feature-branch</b><br><br><b>Open a specific commit:</b><br><b>hub browse -c a1b2c3d4</b><br><br><b>Print URL instead of opening browser:</b><br><b>hub browse -u -f README.md</b><br><br><b>Open an arbitrary URL:</b><br><b>hub browse https://github.com/github/hub/pulls</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>hub</b> project was initiated by Mislav Marohnić to extend the <b>git</b> command-line interface with functionalities specifically tailored for GitHub. Created to streamline common GitHub workflows that previously required visiting the website or using API calls, <b>hub browse</b> emerged as a core utility. Its development focused on leveraging existing Git repository information (remotes, branches, commits) to intelligently construct GitHub URLs, thereby bridging the gap between local development and the web platform. It has evolved alongside GitHub's features, adapting to new URL structures and providing quick access to features like pull requests and specific file views.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays more detailed information about the CI statuses, including individual check names and their outcomes.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Long form of -v, displays more detailed information about the CI statuses, including individual check names and their outcomes.<br><br><b>-R <OWNER/REPO></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the GitHub repository whose CI status should be checked, in the format <i>owner/repository-name</i>.<br><br><b>--repo <OWNER/REPO></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Long form of -R, specifies the GitHub repository whose CI status should be checked, in the format <i>owner/repository-name</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>hub ci-status</i> is a subcommand of the <i>hub</i> tool, which extends <i>git</i> with GitHub-specific functionalities. This command fetches and displays the Continuous Integration (CI) status for the latest commit of the current Git repository's branch on GitHub. It provides a quick overview of whether the associated CI checks (e.g., GitHub Actions, Travis CI, CircleCI) passed, failed, or are pending. This is particularly useful for developers who want to quickly ascertain the health of a pull request or a branch without leaving their terminal. The command interacts directly with the GitHub API to retrieve this information, making it an efficient way to monitor your project's build and test results. It helps in maintaining a smooth development workflow by providing immediate feedback on code changes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <i>hub</i> tool to be installed and configured with appropriate GitHub authentication credentials (e.g., <i>HUB_GITHUB_TOKEN</i> environment variable or <i>hub</i>'s stored credentials).<br>The command relies on the GitHub API to fetch CI status. Rate limits or network issues might affect its performance.<br>It only displays CI status for checks configured and reported to GitHub for the specified repository and commit.<br>For newer GitHub features, the <i>gh</i> (GitHub CLI) command might offer more comprehensive or integrated functionality.


title: CONTEXT AWARENESS
content:
The command intelligently detects the GitHub repository based on the current Git working directory if no <i>--repo</i> option is provided.


title: INTEGRATION WITH GITHUB
content:
It leverages GitHub's commit status API to retrieve the aggregated status of all continuous integration checks associated with a specific commit.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>hub ci-status</i> command emerged as part of the <i>hub</i> project, which began development around 2009. <i>hub</i> was created to bridge the gap between <i>git</i> and GitHub, enabling users to perform common GitHub operations directly from the command line. <i>ci-status</i> was added to provide quick access to continuous integration feedback, reflecting the growing importance of automated testing and deployment workflows in software development. It served as an early command-line interface for monitoring GitHub's built-in and integrated CI services before the advent of the official <i>gh</i> CLI.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<br>`hub clone [<OPTIONS>] <REPOSITORY> [<DIRECTORY>]`<br><br>Examples:<br><I>Clone a repository from a specific owner:</I><br>`hub clone octocat/Spoon-Knife`<br><br><I>Clone a repository belonging to your user/organization:</I><br>`hub clone my-project`<br><br><I>Clone with a specific branch and into a new directory:</I><br>`hub clone --branch main octocat/Spoon-Knife my-fork`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>&lt;REPOSITORY&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the GitHub repository to clone. This can be in `owner/repo` format or just `repo` if hub can infer the owner.<br><br><b><b>&lt;DIRECTORY&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. The name of a new directory to clone into. If not specified, the repository is cloned into a directory named after the repository.<br><br><b><b>[<OPTIONS>]</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;All unrecognized options are passed directly to `git clone(1)`. Common options include:<br><br><ul><li><b>--bare</b>: Make a bare Git repository.</li><li><b>--mirror</b>: Set up a mirror of the remote repository.</li><li><b>--depth &lt;num&gt;</b>: Create a shallow clone with a history truncated to the specified number of commits.</li><li><b>--branch &lt;name&gt;</b>: Instead of cloning the branch pointed to by the remote HEAD, clone the specified branch.</li><li><b>--single-branch</b>: Clone only the history leading to the specified branch.</li><li><b>--recursive</b>: After the clone is created, initialize and update submodules.</li><li><b>--no-checkout</b>: When cloning a repository, do not checkout any branch on the new working tree.</li><li><b>--origin &lt;name&gt;</b>: Use &lt;name&gt; instead of the default 'origin' to name the remote.</li></ul><I>Note: This is not an exhaustive list. Refer to `git clone --help` for all options.</I><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>hub clone</b> is a specialized command within the <b>hub</b> toolset that streamlines the process of cloning GitHub repositories. It acts as a wrapper around the standard <b>git clone</b> command, adding intelligent defaults and conveniences tailored for GitHub.<br><br>Instead of requiring the full `git@github.com:owner/repo.git` or `https://github.com/owner/repo.git` URL, <b>hub clone</b> allows for significantly shorter and more intuitive syntaxes. For example, to clone a repository named `Spoon-Knife` from the user `octocat`, you can simply type `hub clone octocat/Spoon-Knife`. If the repository belongs to the current authenticated user or an organization they are part of, `hub clone my-project` might be sufficient, as <b>hub</b> attempts to infer the owner.<br><br>This command automatically handles the construction of the full Git URL (SSH or HTTPS) based on your <b>hub</b> configuration or detected environment, eliminating the need to manually specify protocols. All standard options supported by <b>git clone</b> are transparently passed through, making <b>hub clone</b> a powerful drop-in replacement that enhances productivity for GitHub workflows. It's particularly useful for quickly pulling down projects, contributing to open-source, or managing your own repositories.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>hub clone</b> relies on the <b>hub</b> tool being properly installed and configured to interact with GitHub. It leverages your GitHub authentication (e.g., via `GITHUB_TOKEN` environment variable or <b>hub</b>'s own configuration files) to determine the appropriate cloning protocol and user context. Without proper <b>hub</b> setup, it may fall back to standard <b>git clone</b> behavior or fail.<br><br>It also inherits all behaviors and potential issues of <b>git clone</b>, as it acts as a wrapper.


title: <I>PROTOCOL SELECTION</I>
content:
<b>hub clone</b> automatically determines whether to use HTTPS or SSH for cloning based on your <b>hub</b> configuration (e.g., `hub.protocol` in your Git config), presence of `GITHUB_USER` or `GITHUB_TOKEN` environment variables, or if you have SSH keys configured for GitHub. You can explicitly configure the preferred protocol using `git config --global hub.protocol ssh` or `git config --global hub.protocol https`.


title: <I>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</I>
content:
<b>hub clone</b> (and <b>hub</b> in general) can utilize environment variables like `GITHUB_USER` and `GITHUB_TOKEN` for authentication and user context, influencing how it resolves repository paths and authenticates with GitHub.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>hub</b> tool, which includes <b>hub clone</b>, was created to bridge the gap between Git and GitHub, making GitHub's features more accessible from the command line. It emerged as an unofficial but widely adopted extension to Git, providing commands that directly map to common GitHub workflows (like creating pull requests, forking, browsing, and cloning). <b>hub clone</b> specifically addresses the repetitive task of typing full GitHub URLs, simplifying it into a more intuitive experience, much like how GitHub's web interface allows simple `owner/repo` notation. Its development has been community-driven, aiming to enhance the CLI experience for GitHub users.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hub create</b> [<I>REPOSITORY_NAME</I>] [<I>OPTIONS</I>]<br><b>hub create</b> <I>ORGANIZATION</I>/<I>REPOSITORY_NAME</I> [<I>OPTIONS</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>REPOSITORY_NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the repository to create. If omitted, the name of the current directory is used.<br><br><b><I>ORGANIZATION</I>/<I>REPOSITORY_NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create the repository under a specific GitHub organization.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--private</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a private repository.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--public</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a public repository (this is the default behavior).<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <I>DESCRIPTION</I>, <b>--description</b> <I>DESCRIPTION</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the repository description.<br><br><b><b>-h</b> <I>HOMEPAGE</I>, <b>--homepage</b> <I>HOMEPAGE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the repository homepage URL.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <I>REMOTE_NAME</I>, <b>--remote</b> <I>REMOTE_NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a Git remote for the new repository with the specified name. Default is <i>origin</i>.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <I>NAME</I>, <b>--team</b> <I>NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Make the repository visible to a specific team within an organization.<br><br><b><b>--push</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Push the current Git HEAD to the newly created GitHub repository.<br><br><b><b>--autoinit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initialize the new repository with a default README.<br><br><b><b>--autoinit --license</b> <I>LICENSE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Auto-initialize with a specified open-source license.<br><br><b><b>--autoinit --gitignore</b> <I>TEMPLATE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Auto-initialize with a <i>.gitignore</i> file based on a template.<br><br><b><b>--template</b> <I>REPOSITORY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initialize the new repository using a template repository.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <I>TOPICS</I>, <b>--topic</b> <I>TOPICS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add topics (comma-separated) to the new repository.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>hub create</i> is a powerful subcommand of <i>hub</i>, a popular command-line tool that extends Git with GitHub-specific functionalities. It streamlines the process of creating new repositories directly on GitHub.<br><br>When invoked in an existing Git repository, it creates a new GitHub repository for it and automatically sets up the <i>origin</i> remote. Alternatively, you can specify a repository name to create an empty GitHub repository, which can then be cloned or pushed to. This command significantly simplifies the initial setup of new projects on GitHub, eliminating the need to navigate the web interface. It supports various options for configuring the repository, such as setting privacy, description, homepage, and even auto-initializing with a license or <i>.gitignore</i> file.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires <i>hub</i> to be installed and correctly configured with your GitHub credentials (e.g., via a personal access token or OAuth token).<br>If creating a repository for the current directory without providing a <i>REPOSITORY_NAME</i>, the command assumes the current directory is already a Git repository and will attempt to push its contents.<br>Interaction with GitHub's API is subject to rate limiting.<br>Creating repositories under an organization requires appropriate permissions.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
<i>hub</i> authenticates with GitHub primarily by looking for a configured <i>github.user</i> and <i>github.token</i> in your Git configuration, or by prompting for credentials if necessary. It can also utilize environment variables like <i>GITHUB_TOKEN</i>.


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
When <i>hub create</i> is run without any arguments in a Git repository, it creates a new GitHub repository with the same name as the current directory and automatically sets up the <i>origin</i> remote to point to it.


title: PUSHING EXISTING CONTENT
content:
The <b>--push</b> option is crucial for projects that already have local commits. It not only creates the remote repository but also pushes the current branch's commits to it, making your local work immediately available on GitHub.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>hub</i> project, from which <i>hub-create</i> originates, was initially developed by Mislav Marohnić. It emerged as a solution to enhance the Git command-line experience with GitHub-specific functionalities, long before the official GitHub CLI (<i>gh</i>) existed. <i>hub-create</i> specifically addressed the common need to quickly provision a new GitHub repository from the terminal, integrating seamlessly with local Git workflows. Its development reflects the increasing demand for command-line automation in web-based developer platforms. <i>hub</i> continues to be a widely used tool for those who prefer to manage their GitHub interactions directly from the terminal.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-y, --yes</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Skips the confirmation prompt</i>, performing the deletion immediately without user interaction. Use with extreme caution as this action is irreversible.<br><br><b><OWNER>/<REPO></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>full name of the GitHub repository to delete</i>, including the owner's username or organization name (e.g., <I>octocat/Spoon-Knife</I>). If this argument is omitted, <b>hub delete</b> attempts to delete the repository associated with the current Git working directory's remote.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>hub delete</b> command is part of the <I>hub</I> tool, an indispensable command-line wrapper for Git that seamlessly integrates with GitHub. This specific subcommand provides the capability to permanently delete a GitHub repository directly from your terminal. It's an essential tool for managing and cleaning up GitHub projects, allowing users to remove personal repositories or those within organizations where they possess the necessary administrative permissions. The command prioritizes safety by typically prompting for confirmation before executing the irreversible deletion. It can operate on the current Git repository's remote or a specified repository name. By offering a direct command-line interface for such a critical operation, <b>hub delete</b> significantly streamlines workflows for developers who prefer to remain in the terminal, eliminating the need to navigate the web interface for repository management tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Deleting a repository is an <b>irreversible action</b> and all its contents, issues, pull requests, wikis, and other associated data will be permanently lost.<br>This command requires <i>appropriate administrative permissions</i> on the GitHub repository. If you lack these permissions, the operation will fail.<br>The <b>hub</b> tool must be correctly installed and configured with a GitHub authentication token or credentials for this command to function.<br>Using the <I>-y</I> or <I>--yes</I> option bypasses the safety confirmation; ensure you are deleting the correct repository when using it.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
<b>hub delete</b>, like other <b>hub</b> commands, relies on GitHub authentication. This is typically managed via a GitHub personal access token (recommended) or, less securely, by storing username and password. Ensure your authentication is properly set up for <b>hub</b> to interact with GitHub APIs.


title: LOCAL VS. REMOTE DELETION
content:
It's important to understand that <b>hub delete</b> <i>only deletes the repository on GitHub</i>. It does <b>not</b> delete your local Git clone of that repository from your machine. You will need to manually remove the local directory if you wish to do so after the remote deletion.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>hub</b> project, initiated around 2009, was created to enhance Git's capabilities with GitHub-specific functionalities. As <b>hub</b> evolved to provide a comprehensive command-line interface for GitHub, the <b>delete</b> subcommand was introduced to address the crucial task of repository removal. Its development has mirrored the growing need for efficient terminal-based GitHub management, allowing developers to handle the entire lifecycle of a repository—from creation to deletion—without leaving their command line.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hub fork</b> [<i>--no-remote</i>] [<i>USER/REPOSITORY</i>]<br><b>hub fork</b> <i>--remote-name</i> &lt;<i>NAME</i>&gt;


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>--no-remote</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents <b>hub-fork</b> from automatically adding the newly created fork as a remote in your local Git repository. The fork will still be created on GitHub.<br><br><b><i>--remote-name</i> &lt;<i>NAME</i>&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom name for the remote that will be added for the forked repository. This overrides the default naming conventions (username or <i>origin</i>).<br><br><b>[<i>USER/REPOSITORY</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific GitHub repository to fork, specified in the format <i>user/repository</i> (e.g., <i>octocat/Spoon-Knife</i>). If omitted, <b>hub-fork</b> defaults to forking the repository associated with the current Git working directory's <i>origin</i> remote.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>hub-fork</b> command creates a GitHub fork of the current repository, or a specified remote repository, directly from the command line. This eliminates the need to manually navigate to the GitHub website to perform the forking action. After successfully creating the fork on GitHub, <b>hub-fork</b> automatically adds this new fork as a Git remote in your local repository. <br><br>By default, if your existing remote is named <i>origin</i>, the newly added fork remote will be named after your GitHub username (e.g., <i>YOUR_USERNAME</i>). If your current remote is named <i>upstream</i> or <i>parent</i>, the fork will be named <i>origin</i>. This intelligent naming scheme helps you manage your personal fork alongside the original upstream repository. It's particularly useful for contributing to open-source projects by streamlining the workflow of creating a personal copy of a project.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command requires <b>hub</b> to be installed and properly configured, and assumes you have valid GitHub authentication credentials for creating repositories. If a fork of the specified repository already exists under your GitHub account, <b>hub-fork</b> might simply add the existing fork as a remote rather than creating a new one.


title: DEFAULT REMOTE NAMING LOGIC
content:
<b>hub-fork</b> intelligently assigns a name to the new remote it adds. If your current main remote is named <i>origin</i> (pointing to the original project), your fork will be added with a remote name matching your GitHub username (e.g., <i>YOUR_USERNAME</i>). If your main remote is named <i>upstream</i> or <i>parent</i>, your fork will typically be added as <i>origin</i>. This logic aims to provide a sensible default setup for contributing to projects.


title: INTEGRATION WITH HUB-CLONE
content:
While <b>hub-fork</b> creates a fork, <b>hub-clone</b> is also aware of forks. When you <b>hub clone</b> a repository that is itself a fork, <b>hub-clone</b> often automatically adds the original upstream repository as a remote named <i>upstream</i>. <b>hub-fork</b> complements this by allowing you to create your own personal fork at any time, even after cloning a project, and have it automatically configured locally.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>hub</b> was developed by Mislav Marohnić as a command-line wrapper for Git, designed to extend its capabilities specifically for interacting with GitHub. The <b>hub-fork</b> command is a fundamental part of <b>hub</b>'s mission to streamline common GitHub workflows, providing a convenient way to perform an action (forking a repository) that traditionally required navigating the GitHub web interface, followed by manual Git remote setup.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hub-init</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>ARGUMENTS</i>]<br><i>Note: The actual syntax and available options are highly dependent on the specific implementation of this custom command.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message outlining available options for this specific implementation.<br><br><b><b>-c &lt;file&gt;</b>, <b>--config=&lt;file&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom configuration file to use for initialization settings, overriding defaults.<br><br><b><b>-y</b>, <b>--yes</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assumes "yes" to all prompts, running in non-interactive mode suitable for automation.<br><br><b><b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a simulated run without making actual changes, showing what would be done.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases verbosity of output for detailed progress and debugging information during execution.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>hub-init</I> is <I>not a standard Linux command</I>. It typically refers to a custom script or a component within a specific system's provisioning or setup process, often encountered in cloud environments, specialized infrastructure deployments, or custom application setups. When present, <I>hub-init</I> would likely automate the initial configuration steps for a "hub" system, which could be a central server, a control plane, or a specific application hub. These steps might include installing necessary packages, configuring network settings, setting up users and permissions, initializing databases, or deploying core services.<br><br>Its exact functionality, syntax, and parameters are entirely dependent on its specific implementation within the environment where it's found. It's often part of a larger automation framework, such as <I>cloud-init</I> for virtual machines, or a custom deployment pipeline designed by system administrators or developers to streamline initial server or service provisioning.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>hub-init</I> is <I>not a universally defined command</I> in Linux. Its existence, functionality, and options are entirely custom to the environment or application it belongs to. <br><br>Consult the documentation or source code specific to your system to understand its actual usage. Misuse of a custom <I>hub-init</I> script without understanding its specific actions could lead to system misconfiguration, data loss, or security vulnerabilities.


title: CUSTOM SCRIPT NATURE
content:
As <I>hub-init</I> is typically a custom script, its behavior can vary wildly from one environment to another. It's crucial to examine the script's source code or accompanying documentation to understand its specific actions, dependencies, and potential side effects within a particular system setup.


title: EXECUTION CONTEXT
content:
This command is often designed to run once, typically during the initial setup or provisioning of a system or application. Rerunning it on an already configured system might lead to unexpected behavior, overwriting existing configurations, or even system instability, unless the script is specifically designed to be idempotent (safe to run multiple times).


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<br><b><I>hub issue</I></b> <I>&lt;subcommand&gt;</I> [<I>options</I>] [<I>arguments</I>]<br><br>Subcommands:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b><I>hub issue list</I></b> [<I>options</I>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b><I>hub issue show</I></b> <I>&lt;ISSUE#&gt;|<URL&gt;</I><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b><I>hub issue create</I></b> [<I>options</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists issues for the current repository. Accepts various filtering and sorting options.<br><br><b>list --state <STATE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters issues by state. <I>STATE</I> can be 'open', 'closed', or 'all'.<br><br><b>list --assignee <USER></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters issues by assignee username.<br><br><b>list --me</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters issues assigned to the current authenticated user.<br><br><b>list --labels <LABELS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters issues by comma-separated labels.<br><br><b>list --sort <FIELD></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sorts issues by 'created', 'updated', or 'comments'.<br><br><b>list --direction <DIR></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort order: 'asc' (ascending) or 'desc' (descending).<br><br><b>list --limit <COUNT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Limits the number of issues fetched.<br><br><b>list --json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the list of issues in JSON format.<br><br><b>show <ISSUE#>|<URL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows details of a specific issue. <I>ISSUE#</I> is the issue number; <I>URL</I> is the full URL to the issue.<br><br><b>create</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new issue in the repository. Accepts options for title, body, labels, and assignment.<br><br><b>create --title <TITLE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the title of the new issue.<br><br><b>create --body <BODY></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the body/description of the new issue. If omitted, an editor will be opened.<br><br><b>create --edit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces opening an editor for title and body, even if they are provided via flags.<br><br><b>create --labels <LABELS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assigns comma-separated labels to the new issue.<br><br><b>create --assignee <USER></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assigns the issue to a specified user.<br><br><b>create --milestone <MILESTONE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assigns the issue to a specified milestone (by name or number).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<br>The <b><I>hub-issue</I></b> command is a specialized subcommand of the <b><I>hub</I></b> tool, which extends Git's functionality to interact seamlessly with GitHub. It provides a powerful command-line interface for managing GitHub issues directly from your terminal, eliminating the need to navigate the web interface for common tasks. Users can list, show details of, and create new issues within their GitHub repositories. This integration allows developers to stay within their command-line workflow while interacting with critical project management aspects on GitHub. It's particularly useful for quick queries, adding issues on the fly, or incorporating issue tracking into scripts. For <b><I>hub-issue</I></b> to function, it requires a local Git repository with a remote configured to a GitHub repository, and proper authentication with GitHub via the <b><I>hub</I></b> setup.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<br>Requires the <b><I>hub</I></b> tool to be installed and properly configured with a GitHub personal access token for authentication. The command operates within a local Git repository that has a remote configured to a GitHub repository (typically 'origin'). Its functionality is a subset of the full GitHub web interface, primarily focused on listing, showing, and creating issues.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
<br><b><I>hub-issue</I></b> relies on <b><I>hub</I></b>'s authentication mechanism, which typically involves a GitHub personal access token. This token is usually stored in Git's configuration or environment variables, allowing <b><I>hub</I></b> to make authenticated requests to the GitHub API on your behalf.


title: REPOSITORY CONTEXT
content:
<br>The command infers the GitHub repository from your current Git project's remotes. It will typically use the 'origin' remote URL to determine the GitHub owner and repository name for issue operations.


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
<br>To list all open issues: <br><I>hub issue list</I><br>To show issue #123: <br><I>hub issue show 123</I><br>To create a new issue: <br><I>hub issue create --title "Fix bug X" --body "Detailed description..." --labels "bug,critical"</I><br>To list issues assigned to you: <br><I>hub issue list --me</I>


title: HISTORY
content:
<br>The <b><I>hub</I></b> project, including the <b><I>hub-issue</I></b> command, was created by Mislav Marohnić. It emerged as a solution to bridge the gap between local Git workflows and GitHub's online features, aiming to make command-line interaction with GitHub as natural as Git itself. Since its inception, <b><I>hub</I></b> has been an open-source project actively maintained by its community, continuously evolving to support new GitHub features and improve user experience.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>huggingface-cli</I> <I>&lt;subcommand&gt;</I> [ <I>&lt;options&gt;</I> ] [ <I>&lt;arguments&gt;</I> ]<br><br>Common subcommands include <I>login</I>, <I>logout</I>, <I>whoami</I>, <I>env</I>, <I>repo</I>, <I>download</I>, and <I>cache</I>.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>login</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Log in</B> to the Hugging Face Hub. Prompts for a token or uses an environment variable.<br><br><b>logout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Log out</B> from the Hugging Face Hub. Clears the local token.<br><br><b>whoami</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Display</B> the currently authenticated user information.<br><br><b>env</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Show environment</B> details relevant to Hugging Face Hub operations, including cache paths and library versions.<br><br><b>repo</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Manage repositories</B> on the Hugging Face Hub. Used for creating, deleting, or cloning repositories.<br><br><b>download</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Download files</B> from a model, dataset, or Space repository on the Hub. Supports specific patterns or full downloads.<br><br><b>upload</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Upload files</B> to a model, dataset, or Space repository on the Hub. Used for pushing local changes.<br><br><b>cache</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Manage the local cache</B> used by Hugging Face libraries. Allows clearing or listing cached files.<br><br><b>refresh-token</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Refresh</B> your Hugging Face authentication token.<br><br><b>lfs-enable-largefiles</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Enable Git LFS</B> for handling large files in local repositories, essential for models and datasets.<br><br><b>scan-for-patterns</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Scan local repositories</B> for common security issues like hardcoded tokens.<br><br><b>convert</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<B>Convert models</B> to different formats (e.g., from `tensorflow` to `pytorch`).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>huggingface-cli</I> is the command-line interface tool for interacting with the Hugging Face Hub. It provides a convenient way for machine learning engineers and developers to manage models, datasets, and Spaces directly from their terminal. This includes <B>authentication</B>, <B>uploading</B> and <B>downloading</B> files, managing <B>repositories</B>, viewing <B>environment information</B>, and configuring <B>local cache</B> settings. It simplifies workflows involving large models and datasets by integrating with the underlying <I>huggingface_hub</I> Python library, making it an essential tool for anyone deeply involved with the Hugging Face ecosystem.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <B>Python <I>huggingface_hub</I> library</B> to be installed.<br> <B>Network connectivity</B> is essential for most operations, especially login, download, and upload.<br> Authentication tokens should be <B>managed securely</B> to prevent unauthorized access to your Hub resources.<br> <B>Rate limiting</B> may apply for extensive download/upload operations.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The CLI often uses configuration stored in <I>~/.cache/huggingface/token</I> or environment variables like <I>HF_HOME</I> and <I>HF_TOKEN</I> for authentication and cache location.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
<B><I>HF_HOME</I></B>: Specifies the directory for caching models, datasets, and other Hugging Face assets.<br><B><I>HF_TOKEN</I></B>: Directly provides the authentication token, useful for CI/CD environments.


title: INTERACTIVE LOGIN
content:
The <B>huggingface-cli login</B> command provides an interactive prompt for entering your Hugging Face token, which is then securely stored locally.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>huggingface-cli</I> tool emerged as a natural extension of the <B>Hugging Face ecosystem</B>, growing alongside the Hugging Face Hub itself. It provides a convenient command-line interface to the functionalities offered by the <I>huggingface_hub</I> Python library. Its development has focused on <B>streamlining common developer workflows</B>, such as authentication, model/dataset sharing, and cache management, making the Hub more accessible and integrated into developer tooling.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hugo</b> [<i>COMMAND</i>] [<i>flags</i>]<br><br>Common Commands:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>hugo new</b> <i>&lt;path/to/content.md&gt;</i><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>hugo server</b> [<i>flags</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>hugo build</b> [<i>flags</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>hugo version</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--source, -s <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filesystem path to read files relative from. Default is the current working directory.<br><br><b>--destination, -d <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filesystem path to write files to. Default is 'public/' relative to the source.<br><br><b>--config, -c <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Config file (default is 'config.toml' or 'config.yaml'). Can be specified multiple times for merging.<br><br><b>--baseURL <i>&lt;url&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hostname (and path) to the root, e.g., 'https://www.example.com/'.<br><br><b>--theme <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Theme to use (located in /themes/&lt;name&gt;/). Specify multiple themes for cascading.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output during site generation.<br><br><b>--environment, -e <i>&lt;env&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Build environment (e.g., 'development', 'production'). Affects configuration and build process.<br><br><b>--minify</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Minify HTML, CSS, JS, and JSON files during build (primarily for <b>hugo build</b>).<br><br><b>--cleanDestinationDir</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove files from the destination directory before building (primarily for <b>hugo build</b>).<br><br><b>--disableFastRender</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables fast render in development, useful for debugging (primarily for <b>hugo server</b>).<br><br><b>--bind <i>&lt;address&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Address to which the local server will bind (e.g., '0.0.0.0' or 'localhost') (for <b>hugo server</b>).<br><br><b>--port <i>&lt;number&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Port on which the local server will listen (default is 1313) (for <b>hugo server</b>).<br><br><b>--liveReloadPort <i>&lt;number&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Port for LiveReload (default is random available port) (for <b>hugo server</b>).<br><br><b>--appendPort</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Appends the port to the baseURL for local development (for <b>hugo server</b>).<br><br><b>--noHTTPCache</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable HTTP caching in development (for <b>hugo server</b>).<br><br><b>--printMemoryUsage</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print memory usage (useful for debugging).<br><br><b>--logFile <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Log file path (if set, logging is enabled to file).<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the Hugo version number.<br><br><b>--help, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show help for a command or subcommand.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Hugo is an open-source static site generator written in Go. It takes content and templates (written in Markdown, HTML, etc.) and transforms them into a collection of static HTML, CSS, and JavaScript files. Unlike traditional content management systems (CMS) that generate pages dynamically on each request, Hugo pre-builds all pages, resulting in incredibly fast load times, enhanced security, and simplified hosting. It is widely used for creating blogs, portfolios, documentation sites, and even complex web applications. Hugo's speed is one of its primary advantages, often building sites in milliseconds. It supports a rich set of features including themes, shortcodes, data files, taxonomies, and LiveReload for development. While it's a command-line tool, its ease of use and powerful features make it a popular choice for developers and content creators alike.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Hugo's primary caveat for beginners is its templating language (Go's text/template) and content organization. While powerful, it requires some initial learning. Debugging complex template issues can sometimes be challenging. Although it produces static files, understanding web server configuration (e.g., for routing or redirects) might be necessary for deployment. It's not a generic Linux command, but rather an application commonly installed and run on Linux systems.


title: THEMES AND CONTENT ORGANIZATION
content:
Hugo supports a rich ecosystem of themes that can be easily installed and customized. Content is typically organized in Markdown files within a 'content' directory, reflecting the site's URL structure. It supports archetypes, which are templates for new content, ensuring consistency.


title: SHORTCODES
content:
Hugo includes 'shortcodes,' which are simple snippets inside Markdown content that Hugo processes during site generation. These allow for embedding complex HTML, custom components, or dynamic content (like YouTube videos or image galleries) without writing raw HTML in content files.


title: DEPLOYMENT
content:
Once a site is built with <b>hugo build</b>, the generated static files (typically in the 'public/' directory) can be deployed to any web server, static hosting service (e.g., Netlify, Vercel, GitHub Pages), or CDN. This simplicity is a major advantage for scalability and low maintenance.


title: HISTORY
content:
Hugo was created by Bjørn Erik Pedersen and released in 2013, written entirely in the Go language. Its development was motivated by a desire for a static site generator that was significantly faster than existing solutions, particularly Jekyll, which was (and still is) popular but written in Ruby. From its inception, Hugo focused on speed, simplicity, and performance, quickly gaining traction within the developer community. Its adoption grew significantly as more developers appreciated its rapid build times and robust feature set for a wide array of static web projects, establishing itself as a leading tool in the static site generation landscape.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
git(1), rsync(1), curl(1), wget(1), make(1), python(1) (for other static site generators like Pelican or Sphinx)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-D, --buildDrafts</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include content marked as drafts in the build.<br><br><b>-F, --buildFuture</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include content with a future publication date.<br><br><b>-E, --buildExpired</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include content past its expiration date.<br><br><b>-w, --watch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Watch for changes to files and rebuild the site (default behavior).<br><br><b>-p, --port <I>number</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the port for the server to listen on (default: 1313).<br><br><b>--bind <I>address</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;IP address to bind to (default: 127.0.0.1).<br><br><b>-s, --source <I>path</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filesystem path to read files relative from; defaults to current working directory.<br><br><b>-t, --theme <I>name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Name of the theme to use (located in the themes directory).<br><br><b>-b, --baseURL <I>url</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hostname and path to the root, e.g., "http://localhost:1313/". Used for internal links.<br><br><b>--disableLiveReload</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable automatic browser refresh on file changes, but still rebuilds the site.<br><br><b>--noHTTPCache</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable HTTP caching for development (useful for debugging).<br><br><b>--cleanDestinationDir</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove files from the public (destination) directory before building.<br><br><b>--config <I>file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the config file (e.g., config.toml, config.yaml). Can be a comma-separated list.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>hugo-server</i> is a subcommand of the Hugo static site generator, primarily used for local development and previewing of Hugo-generated websites. It starts a lightweight web server that serves the generated static files from the public directory. Its most powerful feature is <b>LiveReload</b>, which automatically rebuilds the site and refreshes the browser whenever changes are detected in the source content, templates, or configuration files. This significantly accelerates the development workflow by providing immediate feedback.<br><br>The command handles various content states, allowing developers to include drafts, future-dated, or expired content during development. It can be configured to listen on specific ports and IP addresses, making it flexible for different development setups. Unlike <i>hugo build</i>, <i>hugo-server</i> keeps running, continuously monitoring files and serving the site, making it an indispensable tool for interactive development.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>hugo-server</i> is optimized for local development and previewing. It is <b>not suitable for production deployment</b> due to its simplicity, lack of advanced security features, and limited performance compared to dedicated web servers like Nginx or Apache.<br><br>LiveReload, while powerful, might occasionally have issues with very large sites, complex JavaScript, or specific browser extensions.


title: LIVERELOAD
content:
<i>hugo-server</i> implements a powerful <b>LiveReload</b> feature. It automatically detects changes to content files, templates, and configuration, triggers a quick rebuild of the site, and then sends a signal to the browser tab to refresh, providing instant feedback during development.


title: DEFAULT PORT
content:
By default, <i>hugo-server</i> listens on port <b>1313</b>. If this port is already in use, it will automatically attempt to find and use the next available port, typically 1314, 1315, and so on.


title: HISTORY
content:
Hugo was first released in 2013, written in Go. Its <i>server</i> subcommand has been a core feature from early on, designed to provide a fast and efficient local development experience with its integrated live-reloading capabilities. This emphasis on developer experience, alongside Hugo's speed and flexibility, has been a key factor in its widespread adoption as a leading static site generator.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>hunspell</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>dictionary_name</i>] [<i>text_file</i>]<br><i>hunspell</i> -d <i>dictionary_name</i> [<i>options</i>] &lt; <i>text_file</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-d <i>dictionary</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the dictionary to use. This can be a full path or just the name (e.g., 'en_US').<br><br><b>-i <i>encoding</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the input text encoding (e.g., UTF-8, ISO-8859-1). Automatically detected if not specified.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates the morphological analysis mode. Outputs detailed information about recognized words.<br><br><b>-m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables the stemming mode. Outputs the stem (root form) of each recognized word.<br><br><b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists only the misspelled words, one per line. Useful for piping output.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates the suggestion mode. For each misspelled word, provides a list of suggested corrections.<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the path to the main dictionary directory and lists all available dictionaries.<br><br><b>-u <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a personal dictionary file to add to the main dictionary.<br><br><b>-w</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Word list mode. Prints all known words in the dictionary, one per line.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of <i>hunspell</i>.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a brief help message with available command-line options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>hunspell</i> is a robust command-line spell checker and morphological analyzer widely used in many open-source projects, including LibreOffice, Firefox, and Chromium. It supports a vast number of languages through its flexible dictionary format, which consists of an affix file (<i>.aff</i>) and a dictionary file (<i>.dic</i>).<br><br>The command can operate in various modes: checking for misspellings, suggesting corrections, performing stemming (reducing words to their root form), and providing morphological analysis (breaking down words into their components and grammatical features). It can process input from a specified file or standard input, making it highly versatile for integration into scripts and larger text processing workflows.<br><br>Unlike simpler spell checkers, <i>hunspell</i> utilizes a two-stage process: first, it checks if a word is present in the dictionary or can be generated by affix rules; if not, it then generates suggestions based on edit distance and dictionary entries. This makes it particularly effective for languages with complex morphology.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Dictionary paths are crucial; <i>hunspell</i> looks for dictionaries in specific system-wide and user-specific locations. If a dictionary is not found, the command may fail or report an error.<br><br>While <i>hunspell</i> supports many encodings, mismatches between input file encoding and the specified encoding can lead to incorrect spell checking or garbled output.<br><br>Performance can vary significantly depending on the dictionary size, the complexity of affix rules, and the size of the input text.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>hunspell</i> is a successor of <i>MySpell</i>, which was originally developed for OpenOffice.org. It was designed to be faster and to support a wider range of languages, especially those with complex agglutinative morphology (where words are formed by combining multiple morphemes). Its development was spearheaded by László Németh, and it quickly became the default spell checker in many prominent open-source projects, including the Mozilla Firefox browser and the LibreOffice office suite, due to its robust feature set and open-source licensing.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <interface></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network interface for <B>hunt</B> to listen on. For example, 'eth0' or 'wlan0'.<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug mode, providing more verbose output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>hunt</I> command refers to an <I>obsolete</I> network utility primarily designed for passive monitoring and active hijacking of TCP sessions. Developed in the late 1990s and popular in the early 2000s, it allowed attackers or auditors to intercept network traffic, perform Man-in-the-Middle (MITM) attacks using ARP spoofing, reset connections, and inject data into established TCP sessions. While powerful for its time, <I>hunt</I> is no longer widely used or maintained due to the prevalence of encrypted protocols (like HTTPS and SSH), which render its direct session manipulation capabilities largely ineffective, and the emergence of more sophisticated and actively developed tools. It typically operates in an interactive command-line interface after initial execution.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>hunt</B> is an <I>old and unmaintained</I> tool. It is not part of standard Linux distributions and must be compiled from source or obtained from specialized security archives. Its functionality is severely limited against modern encrypted protocols, making it largely ineffective for real-world session hijacking on the internet. <I>Using this tool for malicious purposes is illegal and unethical.</I>


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
After initial execution with optional command-line arguments, <B>hunt</B> typically enters an interactive mode where users can issue various sub-commands to perform actions like listing discovered hosts (<I>l</I>), initiating ARP attacks (<I>a</I>), performing host discovery (<I>d</I>), or selecting different sniffing modes (<I>s</I>).


title: FUNCTIONALITY OVERVIEW
content:
Beyond basic sniffing, <B>hunt</B> supported advanced features such as TCP session desynchronization, connection reset, packet injection, and the ability to listen for specific strings in unencrypted traffic.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by Gregory DuFour, <B>hunt</B> gained significant popularity in the early 2000s among network security professionals and enthusiasts. It was often included in early versions of penetration testing distributions like BackTrack (the predecessor to Kali Linux). Its development appears to have ceased, and it has been largely superseded by more advanced and actively maintained network analysis and attack tools. The rise of widespread encryption has also rendered many of its core functionalities obsolete for general internet traffic.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <i>interface</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network interface <i>huntd</i> should listen on. If omitted, <i>huntd</i> attempts to automatically select a suitable interface.<br><br><b>-d <i>level</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the debug level. Higher numerical values generally result in more verbose output, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-L <i>logfile</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs <i>huntd</i>'s output and logs to the specified file. This option's availability may vary across different versions.<br><br><b>-c <i>configfile</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file for <i>huntd</i> to load. This option's availability may vary across different versions.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>huntd</i> is the daemon component of the <i>Hunt</i> network monitoring and attack suite. It operates in the background, primarily performing passive sniffing of network traffic and actively engaging in various forms of network manipulation, including TCP/UDP connection hijacking, ARP spoofing, and session resets.<br><br>Designed for network security analysis and penetration testing, <i>huntd</i> enables an attacker to intercept, analyze, and potentially take over established network sessions on unencrypted networks. Its features include detecting and displaying connection information, attempting to spoof packets, and injecting arbitrary data into existing connections.<br><br>Once a prominent tool for ethical hacking and network security assessments, its relevance has decreased with the widespread adoption of encrypted protocols (e.g., HTTPS, SSH) and the availability of more modern network analysis tools. <i>huntd</i> typically requires root privileges to access raw network sockets and perform its operations effectively.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>huntd</i> is an older network utility primarily designed for unencrypted network environments. It requires root privileges to execute and can perform highly destructive network actions such as session hijacking and ARP spoofing, which can severely disrupt network services or compromise sensitive data.<br><br>Its unauthorized use on any network is illegal and unethical. Furthermore, modern Intrusion Detection/Prevention Systems (IDS/IPS) are highly likely to detect and alert on the activities performed by <i>huntd</i>.


title: <B>INTERACTION WITH <I>HUNT</I> CLIENT</B>
content:
<i>huntd</i> functions as a background daemon, passively collecting network information and actively performing specified actions. It communicates with the <i>hunt</i> client utility (also part of the <i>Hunt</i> package), which provides a command-line interface for users to interact with the daemon, view captured data, and initiate various network attacks or analyses.


title: <B>ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS</B>
content:
Given its potent network manipulation capabilities, <i>huntd</i> is classified as an offensive security tool. Its deployment and use should be strictly limited to ethical hacking environments, security research, or penetration testing scenarios on networks where explicit consent and legal authorization have been obtained. Unauthorized use can lead to severe security breaches and legal repercussions.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Hunt</i>, including the <i>huntd</i> daemon, was developed by <i>Michal Zalewski</i> (lcamtuf) in the late 1990s. It rapidly gained notoriety as a powerful tool for network session hijacking and ARP spoofing, becoming a staple in the toolkit of network security researchers and penetration testers of that era. Its development predates the widespread adoption of strong encryption on the internet, making its session hijacking capabilities particularly effective against plaintext protocols like Telnet and FTP. While it played a significant role in demonstrating network vulnerabilities, its active development and widespread usage have declined as network security practices, especially the use of SSL/TLS, have matured.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The typical usage involves npm/yarn scripts or direct invocation:<br><br><b>npm install husky</b><br><b>npm set-script prepare "husky install"</b><br><b>npm run prepare</b><br><br>Then, to add hooks (example for <i>pre-commit</i>):<br><b>husky add .husky/pre-commit "npm test"</b><br><br>Or manually create and make executable hook files in the <i>.husky/</i> directory:<br><i><I>~/.husky/pre-commit</I></i><br><i><I>#!/bin/sh</I></i><br><i><I>. "$(dirname "$0")/_/husky.sh"</I></i><br><i><I>npm test</I></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>install [directory]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets up <i>husky</i> by creating or updating the Git hooks directory (usually <i>.git/hooks</i>) to point to <i>husky</i>'s scripts. An optional <i>directory</i> can specify where <i>husky</i>'s configuration files (e.g., <i>.husky/</i>) are located. Typically run via a 'prepare' script in <i>package.json</i> during dependency installation.<br><br><b>uninstall</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes <i>husky</i>'s integration from the Git hooks directory, restoring the original state or removing symbolic links created by <i>husky</i>.<br><br><b>add <hook-name> <command></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new hook script to the <i>.husky/</i> directory. <i><hook-name></i> is the standard Git hook name (e.g., <i>pre-commit</i>, <i>pre-push</i>), and <i><command></i> is the shell command(s) to execute within that hook.<br><br><b>set <hook-name> <command></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Similar to 'add', but explicitly sets or replaces the content of a hook script with the given command(s). This is useful for directly defining or updating a hook's action.<br><br><b>run <hook-name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manually executes a specific <i>husky</i> hook script. This command is primarily used for testing or debugging hook logic outside of a live Git operation.<br><br><b>init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An internal command used for initializing <i>husky</i>'s setup files and directory structure. It's typically part of <i>husky</i>'s automated installation process and rarely invoked directly by users.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>husky</i> is a popular and widely adopted tool that simplifies the management of Git hooks within development projects. It allows developers to define and run custom scripts automatically before or after specific Git actions, such as committing, pushing, or merging code. By integrating seamlessly with the project's version control system, <i>husky</i> helps enforce code quality standards, run linters, execute automated tests, or perform other necessary tasks. This ensures code consistency, prevents common issues, and maintains a high level of code integrity before changes are integrated into the main codebase. While extensively used in JavaScript/TypeScript ecosystems, its design is language-agnostic, relying on simple shell scripts for hook execution, making it versatile for any project.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>husky</i> requires Node.js and a package manager (npm or yarn) to be installed on the system, as it's primarily used in Node.js-based projects. It also relies on Git being available. Users can bypass <i>husky</i> hooks during Git operations by explicitly using the <i>--no-verify</i> flag (e.g., <i>git commit --no-verify</i>). Hook scripts executed by <i>husky</i> run in the project's root directory, so paths within scripts should be relative to this location. Compatibility with certain CI/CD environments might require specific setup adjustments to ensure hooks run correctly.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>husky</i> hooks are configured as simple shell scripts located in the <i>.husky/</i> directory at the project's root. Each file name within this directory corresponds to a standard Git hook (e.g., <i>.husky/pre-commit</i>, <i>.husky/pre-push</i>). These files must be executable (e.g., <i>chmod +x .husky/pre-commit</i>) and contain the shell commands that <i>husky</i> will run when the corresponding Git action occurs. For example, a <i>pre-commit</i> file might contain commands like <i>npm run lint</i> or <i>npm test</i>.


title: TYPICAL WORKFLOW
content:
The typical workflow for integrating <i>husky</i> into a project involves a few key steps:<br>1. Install <i>husky</i> as a development dependency: <b>npm install --save-dev husky</b><br>2. Add a 'prepare' script to your <i>package.json</i> to automatically install <i>husky</i>'s hooks: <b>"prepare": "husky install"</b><br>3. Run the 'prepare' script (often automatically by <b>npm install</b> or by executing <b>npm run prepare</b>).<br>4. Create hook files directly in the <i>.husky/</i> directory (e.g., <b>echo 'npm test' > .husky/pre-commit</b> and then <b>chmod +x .husky/pre-commit</b>) or use the <b>husky add</b> command to generate them.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>husky</i> emerged as a modern solution to simplify Git hook management, addressing the complexities of manually setting up and maintaining hook scripts across different development environments. Its popularity grew rapidly, especially within the JavaScript ecosystem, due to its ease of use and robustness. Earlier versions involved more direct modifications to the <i>package.json</i> file for hook configuration. However, versions 7 and above introduced a simpler, file-based configuration where hooks are plain executable shell scripts located in a dedicated <i>.husky/</i> directory, making them easier to manage, track with version control, and less prone to configuration conflicts.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hut</b> [<i>options</i>] &lt;<i>local_port</i>&gt; &lt;<i>remote_host</i>&gt; &lt;<i>remote_port</i>&gt;<br><b>hut</b> <b>-R</b> [<i>options</i>] &lt;<i>local_port</i>&gt; &lt;<i>remote_host</i>&gt; &lt;<i>remote_port</i>&gt;<br><b>hut</b> <b>setup</b> &lt;<i>host</i>&gt;


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>&lt;<i>local_port</i>&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The local port on which <i>hut</i> will listen for incoming connections to tunnel.<br><br><b><b>&lt;<i>remote_host</i>&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The target remote host to which the tunnel should be established.<br><br><b><b>&lt;<i>remote_port</i>&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The port on the remote host to which the tunnel should connect.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output for detailed execution information.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--daemon</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run <i>hut</i> in the background as a daemon.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force setup, potentially overwriting existing configurations.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--open</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically open the tunnel after establishment (e.g., open a browser).<br><br><b><b>-x</b>, <b>--no-open</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not automatically open the tunnel (conflicts with <b>-o</b>).<br><br><b><b>-R</b>, <b>--reverse</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a reverse tunnel, allowing remote hosts to connect to a local service via the tunnel.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>CONFIG</i>, <b>--config</b> <i>CONFIG</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative configuration file path.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--no-listener</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For reverse tunnels (<b>-R</b>), do not create a local listener.<br><br><b><b>setup</b> <b>&lt;<i>host</i>&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Command to set up necessary SSH configurations (e.g., <i>ProxyCommand</i>) for a specified host.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>hut</i> command is a specialized Python-based utility designed to establish secure SSH tunnels in network environments where direct SSH access is restricted.<br>It primarily addresses scenarios where firewalls limit outbound connections to only standard web ports, such as HTTP (80) and HTTPS (443). By leveraging the <i>ProxyCommand</i> feature within SSH, <i>hut</i> can encapsulate SSH traffic within these allowed ports, effectively creating a secure conduit through strict firewall rules. This allows users to access internal network services or hosts that would otherwise be unreachable.<br><i>hut</i> simplifies the configuration process for both local and reverse tunnels, making it easier to manage complex SSH tunneling setups for bypassing network restrictions. It's particularly useful for developers or system administrators needing to access resources behind corporate firewalls or highly secured networks, enabling remote access to services like databases, internal web servers, or other machines.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>hut</i> is not a standard Linux command; it requires manual installation, typically via <i>pip</i> or by cloning its source from GitHub.<br>It relies on Python and a compatible SSH server on the remote side, often requiring specific <i>sshd_config</i> settings (e.g., allowing <i>ProxyCommand</i> or specific port forwarding).<br>Improper use could pose security risks by bypassing intended network segmentation and exposing internal services.<br>Its functionality is highly dependent on network firewall configurations allowing outbound connections on common web ports (80/443).


title: <I>RELIANCE ON SSH CONFIGURATION</I>
content:
The <i>hut</i> command heavily relies on the underlying SSH client and server configurations. Specifically, it often utilizes the <i>ProxyCommand</i> or <i>ProxyJump</i> directives within the SSH configuration file (e.g., <i>~/.ssh/config</i>) on the client side to establish the initial connection through an intermediary host on port 80 or 443. The remote SSH server must also be configured to properly handle these proxied connections, sometimes involving specific <i>ForceCommand</i> or <i>PermitTunnel</i> settings for the tunnel to function correctly.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>hut</i> command is an open-source project, primarily developed in Python by Simon H. Zschach (<i>sshz</i>). It emerged as a solution for specific network challenges related to establishing SSH tunnels through highly restrictive firewalls. Not being part of core Linux utilities, its development and distribution are managed through platforms like GitHub, reflecting a community-driven approach to niche network tools. Its usage has grown among users facing specific firewall traversal issues rather than being a universally adopted command.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--show</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the current time of the hardware clock.<br><br><b><b>--systohc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the hardware clock from the current system time.<br><br><b><b>--hctosys</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the system time from the hardware clock.<br><br><b><b>--set</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the hardware clock to the time specified by the <b>--date</b> option. This requires superuser privileges.<br><br><b><b>--date="<i>YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS</i>"</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the new time to set the hardware clock to, used in conjunction with <b>--set</b>.<br><br><b><b>--utc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Tells <i>hwclock</i> that the hardware clock is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). This is the recommended setting for Linux systems.<br><br><b><b>--localtime</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Tells <i>hwclock</i> that the hardware clock is set to local time. This is often used in dual-boot systems where another OS (e.g., Windows) expects the RTC to be in local time.<br><br><b><b>--adjust</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adjust the hardware clock for systematic drift. This requires a drift file (e.g., <i>/etc/adjtime</i>) that <i>hwclock</i> maintains to track the clock's inaccuracy.<br><br><b><b>--rtc=<i>dev</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the RTC device to use (e.g., <i>/dev/rtc0</i>). If not specified, <i>hwclock</i> attempts to find one automatically.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>hwclock</i> is a utility for accessing and managing the system's Real Time Clock (RTC), also known as the hardware clock. <br><br> The RTC is a persistent clock that runs even when the system is powered off, typically backed by a small battery. The system clock, on the other hand, is a software clock maintained by the kernel and can be easily adjusted. <br><br> <i>hwclock</i>'s primary functions include reading the time from the RTC to set the system clock (commonly performed at boot), or writing the current system time back to the RTC (often done at shutdown or periodically). It is crucial for maintaining accurate time across reboots, especially in systems without constant network time synchronization (NTP).


title: CAVEATS
content:
When Network Time Protocol (NTP) or similar services (like chrony) are running, they actively manage the system clock. Using <i>hwclock --systohc</i> while NTP is active can interfere with its operation, as NTP is designed to keep the system clock highly accurate.<br><br>The RTC relies on a small battery; if this battery dies, the RTC time will become unreliable.<br><br>The choice between <b>--utc</b> and <b>--localtime</b> is critical. Misconfiguration can lead to incorrect time after a reboot, especially during Daylight Saving Time transitions.


title: SYSTEM CLOCK VS. HARDWARE CLOCK (RTC)
content:
The <b>System Clock</b> is a software clock maintained by the Linux kernel. It starts from 0 at boot and is typically synchronized with the RTC at startup, or continuously updated by network time services (NTP/chrony). The <b>Hardware Clock (RTC)</b> is an independent, battery-backed chip on the motherboard that keeps time even when the system is powered off. <i>hwclock</i> interacts directly with the RTC.


title: TIME SYNCHRONIZATION AT BOOT/SHUTDOWN
content:
Traditionally, at system boot, <i>hwclock --hctosys</i> is run to set the system clock from the RTC. Conversely, at system shutdown, <i>hwclock --systohc</i> is often executed to save the current, accurate system time back to the RTC, ensuring the RTC remains synchronized.


title: UTC VS. LOCAL TIME CONFIGURATION
content:
It is generally recommended practice for the hardware clock (RTC) to be set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). This avoids issues with Daylight Saving Time (DST) changes. The Linux kernel then calculates the local time based on the RTC's UTC time and the system's configured timezone. If the system is dual-booting with an operating system (like Windows) that expects the RTC to be set to local time, special consideration (e.g., configuring Linux to treat RTC as local time or configuring Windows to use UTC) is needed to prevent time discrepancies.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>hwclock</i> has been a fundamental utility in Linux systems for managing the Real Time Clock (RTC) since early versions. Its primary role has been to synchronize the hardware clock with the software system clock, especially during boot and shutdown, ensuring time persistence across reboots. In modern Linux distributions that use systemd, <i>timedatectl</i> has largely superseded <i>hwclock</i> for general time management, offering a more integrated and user-friendly approach. However, <i>hwclock</i> still serves its purpose for specific RTC operations or on systems that do not use systemd.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show all hardware information. This is the default behavior if no specific device type is requested.<br><br><b><b>--cpu</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about the CPU(s).<br><br><b><b>--memory</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about the RAM modules.<br><br><b><b>--disk</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about hard disks and other storage devices.<br><br><b><b>--netcard</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about network interface cards.<br><br><b><b>--gfxcard</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about graphics cards.<br><br><b><b>--sound</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about sound cards.<br><br><b><b>--pci</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show all PCI devices detected.<br><br><b><b>--usb</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show all USB devices detected.<br><br><b><b>--bios</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show BIOS and DMI/SMBIOS information.<br><br><b><b>--monitor</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about connected monitors.<br><br><b><b>--short</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a summarized version of the output, showing less detail.<br><br><b><b>--bus</b> <i>&lt;type&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scan only a specific bus type (e.g., <i>pci</i>, <i>usb</i>).<br><br><b><b>--log</b> <i>&lt;filename&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write the output to the specified file instead of standard output.<br><br><b><b>--hwid</b> <i>&lt;id&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information for a specific hardware ID.<br><br><b><b>--only</b> <i>&lt;id&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information only for the given hardware ID.<br><br><b><b>--recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scan recursively for all devices.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b> <i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable debug output for diagnostics (<i>level</i> is an integer).<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version of <b>hwinfo</b>.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>hwinfo</b> command is a powerful utility designed to probe for and display detailed information about the hardware components detected on a Linux system. It gathers data from various sources, including the BIOS (via DMI/SMBIOS), PCI bus, USB bus, CPUID instructions, and kernel modules. This comprehensive tool can identify a wide range of hardware, such as CPUs, memory, storage devices, network cards, graphics cards, sound cards, monitors, and more.<br><br><b>hwinfo</b> is invaluable for system administrators, developers, and users alike. It aids in troubleshooting hardware issues, compiling hardware inventories, verifying driver compatibility, and understanding system configurations. Unlike some lower-level tools that focus on a single type of bus or component, <b>hwinfo</b> strives to provide a consolidated and often human-readable overview of the entire system's hardware landscape.


title: CAVEATS
content:
For <b>hwinfo</b> to provide complete and accurate information, especially concerning low-level details or devices requiring direct hardware access, it often needs to be run with root privileges (e.g., using <b>sudo</b>). Without root access, some information might be missing or appear incomplete, as it cannot access certain kernel interfaces or files like <i>/dev/mem</i>.<br><br>The output can be very verbose, especially when requesting all hardware information, which might require piping the output to a pager like <b>less</b> or redirecting it to a file. While generally reliable, the accuracy of the reported information depends on the underlying kernel's ability to expose hardware details and the correctness of DMI/SMBIOS data provided by the system's firmware.


title: OUTPUT STRUCTURE
content:
The output of <b>hwinfo</b> is typically structured in sections for each detected hardware component. Each component is identified by a unique ID and its type, followed by a detailed list of attributes such as model, vendor, driver, bus information, capabilities, and configuration parameters. The output often includes both human-readable descriptions and technical identifiers.


title: DEPENDENCIES AND DATA SOURCES
content:
<b>hwinfo</b> relies on various kernel interfaces and system files to gather its data. Key sources include the <i>/sys</i> filesystem (sysfs), <i>/proc</i> filesystem, DMI/SMBIOS tables accessible via kernel interfaces (often requiring root), and direct probing of PCI and USB buses. It also uses internal databases and rules to interpret raw hardware IDs into understandable device names and properties.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>hwinfo</b> originated as part of the SUSE Linux distribution's effort to provide a robust and centralized hardware detection mechanism. Over time, its usefulness led to its adoption in other Linux distributions. It was developed to create a single, consistent source for hardware information, abstracting away the need for users to manually parse outputs from multiple low-level tools like <b>lspci</b>, <b>lsusb</b>, and <b>dmidecode</b>. Its design focuses on presenting information in a structured and easily digestible format, significantly simplifying hardware inventory and diagnostics on Linux systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c, --config <I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative path to the configuration file, overriding the default.<br><br><b>-f, --force-tui</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the terminal user interface (TUI) mode, even if stdout is not a TTY (e.g., when piping).<br><br><b>-g, --log <I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a path for logging editor activities and debugging information.<br><br><b>-s, --session <I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a path for the editor session file, allowing sessions to be loaded or saved.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and available command-line options.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the Helix editor version information to standard output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>hx</b> is the command-line interface for the <I>Helix</I> text editor, a powerful and modern editor inspired by <I>Vim</I> and <I>Kakoune</I>. It emphasizes a "modal" editing paradigm where commands are executed by first selecting text and then applying an action. Unlike traditional <I>Vim</I>, <I>Helix</I> is "select-then-act" focused. It's built with Rust, making it fast and memory-safe.<br><br>Key features include built-in Language Server Protocol (LSP) integration for intelligent code completion and diagnostics, multiple selections, and syntax highlighting powered by Tree-sitter. It aims to provide an out-of-the-box, batteries-included editing experience without extensive plugin configuration, making it a compelling alternative for developers seeking a modern, efficient, and highly configurable text editing environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>hx</b> is a text editor designed primarily for interactive use and is not typically suitable for non-interactive scripting without specific subcommands.<br>Its configuration is written in TOML, which differs from configuration formats used by editors like <I>Vim</I> (Vimscript) or <I>Emacs</I> (Emacs Lisp).<br><I>Helix</I> is a relatively new editor and may not be pre-installed on all Linux distributions. Users might need to install it manually or via their distribution's package manager.<br>While inspired by <I>Vim</I>, its core "select-then-act" modal editing paradigm differs significantly from <I>Vim</I>'s "command-then-motion" approach.


title: SUBCOMMANDS
content:
<b>hx</b> supports several useful subcommands for specific tasks:<br><ul><li><I>--health</I>: Checks the status of the editor and its configured language servers, useful for debugging LSP issues.</li><li><I>--config-loader</I>: Parses and prints the merged configuration, aiding in configuration debugging.</li><li><I>--tutor</I>: Launches an interactive tutorial directly within the editor, ideal for new users to learn basic commands.</li><li><I>--themes</I>: Lists all available syntax highlighting themes that can be used in the editor's configuration.</li><li><I>--grammars</I>: Lists all available Tree-sitter grammars, which provide accurate syntax parsing for various languages.</li><li><I>--debug-tree <I>FILE</I></I>: Prints the syntax tree for a specified file, useful for grammar development and understanding parsing.</li><li><I>--debug-language-server <I>SERVER_NAME</I> <I>FILE</I></I>: Allows debugging a specific language server's interaction with a file.</li><li><I>--build-info</I>: Displays detailed build information about the Helix editor, including version and compile-time features.</li></ul>


title: BASIC USAGE
content:
To open an existing file, simply type <I>hx <I>filename</I></I>. If the specified file does not exist, <I>Helix</I> will create a new buffer for it, and the file will be saved upon writing. To start a new empty buffer without immediately associating it with a file, just type <I>hx</I>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>Helix</I> editor began development around 2020 by the community, primarily driven by core developer `pascalkuthe`. It was conceived as a modern, Rust-based editor aiming to combine the best aspects of <I>Vim</I>'s modal editing and <I>Kakoune</I>'s "select-then-act" paradigm, along with built-in LSP and Tree-sitter support. Its rapid development and opinionated defaults quickly attracted a strong following, positioning it as a powerful alternative to established editors for developers seeking a fast, efficient, and well-integrated coding experience without extensive plugin management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>hydra</b> [<i>&lt;credentials&gt;</i>] [<i>&lt;general options&gt;</i>] <i>&lt;target&gt;</i> <i>&lt;service&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;service specific options&gt;</i>]<br><br><b>Examples of &lt;credentials&gt; options:</b><br> &nbsp; -l &lt;<i>login</i>&gt; : Specify a single login username.<br> &nbsp; -L &lt;<i>file</i>&gt; : Load usernames from &lt;<i>file</i>&gt;.<br> &nbsp; -p &lt;<i>password</i>&gt; : Specify a single password.<br> &nbsp; -P &lt;<i>file</i>&gt; : Load passwords from &lt;<i>file</i>&gt;.<br> &nbsp; -C &lt;<i>file</i>&gt; : Load 'user:pass' combinations from &lt;<i>file</i>&gt;.<br><br><b>&lt;target&gt; :</b> The target host (IP address or hostname) or URL (e.g., ssh://192.168.1.1).<br><b>&lt;service&gt; :</b> The service to attack (e.g., ssh, ftp, http-get, smb, mysql).


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b> <i>&lt;login&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a single login username to be used.<br><br><b><b>-L</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a list of usernames from the specified <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>&lt;password&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a single password to be used.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a list of passwords from the specified <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>.<br><br><b><b>-C</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a colon-separated <i>user:pass</i> list from the specified <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;port&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target port. Overrides the default port for the service.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>&lt;tasks&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of parallel tasks (connections) per target.<br><br><b><b>-vV</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables very verbose mode, showing every password attempt and additional debugging info.<br><br><b><b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose mode, showing the login:password combination currently being attempted.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes all discovered valid credentials to the specified output <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>.<br><br><b><b>-F</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exits immediately after finding the first successful login/password combination for any target.<br><br><b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exits after finding the first successful login/password combination for a specific target.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>&lt;nsr&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs additional password checks: <b>n</b> (null password), <b>s</b> (login as password), <b>r</b> (reverse login as password).<br><br><b><b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to the service using SSL/TLS.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug mode, providing more detailed output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i>&lt;min:max:charset&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a character-set brute force attack. Example: <i>-x 4:6:aA1</i> for 4-6 char alphanumeric.<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a list of target servers (IPs or hostnames) from the specified <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>.<br><br><b><b>-W</b> <i>&lt;time&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a wait time in milliseconds between attempts to prevent detection or overwhelming the target.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Hydra is a powerful and very fast network login cracker that supports numerous protocols to attack. It is widely used by penetration testers and security researchers to demonstrate the ease of guessing or brute-forcing weak credentials on various network services. By attempting a large number of username and password combinations, Hydra aims to find valid login credentials. <br><br>The tool is highly versatile, capable of performing dictionary attacks, brute-force attacks, and even combining user and password lists. Its extensive protocol support includes, but is not limited to, FTP, SSH, HTTP (Basic, Digest, Form-Auth), SMB, SMTP, POP3, IMAP, VNC, Telnet, RDP, MySQL, PostgreSQL, Cisco, and many others. Hydra is an essential tool for auditing password security, identifying weak points in network services, and ensuring robust access control mechanisms are in place.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using Hydra (or any brute-forcing tool) against systems you do not have explicit permission to test is illegal and unethical. <br><br>Be aware that extensive use can generate significant network traffic, potentially trigger Intrusion Detection/Prevention Systems (IDS/IPS), or cause account lockouts on the target system. Always understand the target's security policies and potential consequences before running Hydra.


title: SUPPORTED PROTOCOLS
content:
Hydra boasts extensive support for a wide range of network protocols. These include common services like <b>FTP</b>, <b>SSH</b>, <b>Telnet</b>, <b>HTTP/HTTPS</b> (supporting Basic, Digest, GET/POST forms, and NTLM), <b>SMB</b>, <b>VNC</b>, <b>RDP</b>, and database services such as <b>MySQL</b>, <b>PostgreSQL</b>, and <b>MS-SQL</b>. It also supports less common protocols like Cisco AAA, SIP, POP3, IMAP, SMTP, IRC, and many others, making it highly versatile for diverse auditing scenarios.


title: HISTORY
content:
Hydra was developed by <I>van Hauser</I> and the <I>THC (The Hacker's Choice)</I> crew. It first emerged in the early 2000s and has since become one of the most widely used and actively maintained open-source network login cracking tools. Its development has consistently focused on expanding protocol support and improving attack speed, making it a staple in penetration testing distributions like Kali Linux and Parrot OS for over two decades.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<pre><b>hyperfine</b> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>COMMAND</I>...<br><b>hyperfine</b> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [--runs <I>N</I>] [--warmup <I>W</I>] [--prepare <I>PREP_CMD</I>] [--export-json <I>FILE</I>] <I>COMMAND</I>...</pre>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--runs <N>, -r <N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of benchmark runs for each command. <br>Defaults to 10.<br><br><b>--warmup <W>, -w <W></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of warm-up runs for each command. <br>These runs are not measured and help mitigate caching effects.<br><br><b>--prepare <CMD>, -p <CMD></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Command(s) to execute before each benchmark run. <br>Useful for resetting the environment or generating temporary files.<br><br><b>--setup <CMD>, -s <CMD></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Command(s) to execute once before <b>all</b> benchmark runs.<br><br><b>--cleanup <CMD>, -c <CMD></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Command(s) to execute once after <b>all</b> benchmark runs.<br><br><b>--export-json <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports the benchmark results to the specified JSON file.<br><br><b>--export-markdown <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports the benchmark results to the specified Markdown file.<br><br><b>--export-csv <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports the benchmark results to the specified CSV file.<br><br><b>--min-runs <N>, -m <N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Minimum number of benchmark runs. <br>Hyperfine will perform at least this many runs, potentially more until statistical significance is reached or <code>--max-runs</code> / <code>--time-limit</code> is hit.<br><br><b>--max-runs <N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum number of benchmark runs.<br><br><b>--time-limit <SECONDS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum total time to spend benchmarking each command.<br><br><b>--show-output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the stdout/stderr of the benchmarked commands.<br><br><b>--ignore-output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores stdout/stderr of the benchmarked commands when checking for success.<br><br><b>--command-name <NAME></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a custom name for the following command in the output.<br><br><b>--shell <SHELL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the shell to use for executing commands (e.g., <code>bash</code>, <code>zsh</code>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Hyperfine is a powerful command-line benchmarking tool designed for accurately measuring the execution time of shell commands. Unlike simpler tools like `time`, Hyperfine performs multiple runs of each command, detects outliers, and provides robust statistical analysis of the results. It includes features like warm-up runs, a mechanism for preparing the environment before each run, and cleaning up afterward, ensuring consistent and fair comparisons. The tool can export detailed results in various formats, including JSON, Markdown, and CSV, making it easy to integrate into automated workflows or for generating reports. Its emphasis on statistical rigor helps users obtain reliable performance metrics, making it ideal for optimizing scripts, comparing different implementations, or tracking performance regressions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <code>hyperfine</code> offers superior accuracy compared to <code>time</code>, it's important to consider:<br><br><ul><li><b>Measurement Overhead:</b> For extremely short-duration commands (e.g., sub-millisecond), the overhead of <code>hyperfine</code> itself can become a significant portion of the measured time, potentially skewing results.</li><li><b>External Factors:</b> Benchmark results can still be influenced by external system load, CPU frequency scaling, I/O contention, and other background processes. For highly precise measurements, consider running in an isolated environment.</li><li><b>Reproducibility:</b> Achieving perfectly identical results across different machines or even different runs on the same machine can be challenging due to system variability. Focus on trends and statistical significance rather than absolute single-run values.</li></ul>


title: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS AND OUTPUT
content:
<code>hyperfine</code> provides detailed statistical output including mean, standard deviation, and median execution times. It visually represents the distribution of run times and highlights any detected outliers. For multiple commands, it calculates and displays the speed-up factor between them, complete with confidence intervals, which is crucial for determining if performance differences are statistically significant.


title: OUTLIER DETECTION
content:
The tool automatically detects and flags outliers in the measured execution times, which could be due to transient system disturbances. These outliers are shown in the output and can be optionally excluded from statistical calculations for a more robust average.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>hyperfine</code> was created by David Peter and is written in <I>Rust</I>, leveraging its performance and safety features. It emerged as a more robust and statistically sound alternative to traditional shell <code>time</code> commands, addressing common pitfalls like single-run measurements, lack of warm-up, and absence of outlier detection. Its development focused on providing a user-friendly interface combined with scientific rigor, quickly gaining popularity in the developer community for reproducible and reliable benchmarking of shell scripts and executables. The first public release (0.1.0) was around September 2017.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>dispatch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Send a dispatch command to Hyprland for various actions (e.g., move window, switch workspace, execute a program).<br><br><b>setoption</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a Hyprland configuration option dynamically at runtime, overriding values in hyprland.conf.<br><br><b>getoption</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieve the current value of a specific Hyprland configuration option.<br><br><b>setprop</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a property for a specific object, such as a window rule or a client.<br><br><b>getprop</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieve a property for a specific object (e.g., a window's attribute).<br><br><b>reload</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reload the Hyprland configuration file (hyprland.conf) without restarting the compositor.<br><br><b>kill</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Kill the currently active window or a specified client by its address.<br><br><b>workspaces</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all active workspaces and their detailed properties (e.g., occupied, monitor, active state).<br><br><b>monitors</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all connected monitors and their properties (e.g., resolution, position, active workspace).<br><br><b>clients</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all active window clients and their detailed properties (e.g., title, class, address, fullscreen state).<br><br><b>activewindow</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Get detailed information about the currently focused window, including its class, title, and position.<br><br><b>version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the current Hyprland and <i>hyprctl</i> application versions, along with build information.<br><br><b>help / commands</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a comprehensive list of all available <i>hyprctl</i> commands and their basic usage syntax.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>hyprctl</i> is the official command-line utility for Hyprland, a highly customizable dynamic tiling Wayland compositor. It provides a powerful interface to interact with and query the state of the running Hyprland session.<br><br>Users can use <i>hyprctl</i> to send commands for window management (e.g., moving windows, switching workspaces), configure settings on the fly, retrieve information about monitors, workspaces, and active clients, and even reload the Hyprland configuration without restarting. It's an essential tool for scripting custom behaviors, integrating Hyprland with other applications, and debugging. Its flexible command structure allows for granular control over various aspects of the compositor, making it a cornerstone for advanced Hyprland users and developers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>hyprctl</b> requires the Hyprland Wayland compositor to be running for most commands to function, as it communicates with the active session.<br>The available commands, their arguments, and output formats are specific to the Hyprland version and may change between releases, requiring users to consult the official documentation for their installed version.<br>It is primarily intended for programmatic control, scripting, or advanced user configuration, rather than general interactive shell navigation.


title: COMMAND OUTPUT AND SCRIPTING
content:
Many <b>hyprctl</b> commands, particularly query commands like <i>workspaces</i>, <i>monitors</i>, and <i>clients</i>, output their results in JSON format. This structured output makes <b>hyprctl</b> highly scriptable and easy to parse with command-line JSON processors like <i>jq</i>, enabling powerful automation and custom workflows.


title: PERMISSIONS AND COMMUNICATION
content:
<b>hyprctl</b> communicates with the running Hyprland compositor instance via a Unix socket, typically located in the user's runtime directory (e.g., <code>/tmp/hypr/&lt;user_socket_id&gt;/.socket.sock</code>). This means that the command must generally be executed by the same user who is running the Hyprland session to have the necessary permissions to interact with it.


title: HISTORY
content:
Hyprland, a dynamic tiling Wayland compositor, began its development in early 2022. <b>hyprctl</b> was introduced as its primary command-line interface from the project's early stages, evolving alongside the compositor to provide robust control and introspection capabilities. Its design reflects the modular and customizable nature of Hyprland, allowing users to script complex interactions and manage the environment without direct GUI interaction, becoming an integral part of the Hyprland ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>add</b> <i>&lt;url&gt;</i> [<b>--name</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new plugin from the specified Git repository URL. Optionally assigns a custom name for the plugin.<br><br><b><b>remove</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes an installed plugin by its name.<br><br><b><b>list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all installed plugins, showing their status (enabled/disabled) and other relevant information.<br><br><b><b>enable</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables a previously installed and disabled plugin, making it active for <I>Hyprland</I>.<br><br><b><b>disable</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables an active plugin without removing it, preventing it from loading with <I>Hyprland</I>.<br><br><b><b>update</b> [<i>&lt;name&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Updates all installed plugins, or a specific plugin if a name is provided, to their latest versions from their respective Git repositories.<br><br><b><b>install</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Installs the plugins that have been added but not yet compiled/installed. This command typically compiles and places them in the correct <I>Hyprland</I> plugin directory.<br><br><b><b>build</b> [<i>&lt;name&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Builds (compiles) all plugins, or a specific plugin if a name is provided. This is usually done automatically by 'install' but can be triggered manually.<br><br><b><b>clean</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Cleans up build artifacts and temporary files generated during the plugin compilation process.<br><br><b><b>docs</b> [<i>&lt;name&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the documentation for all installed plugins, or a specific plugin if a name is provided, usually by opening the repository URL in a browser.<br><br><b><b>config</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the configuration directory for <b>hyprpm</b>, allowing manual inspection or modification of plugin settings.<br><br><b><b>completion</b> [<i>&lt;shell&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates shell completion scripts for <b>hyprpm</b> for various shells (e.g., bash, zsh, fish).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>hyprpm</b> is a dedicated plugin manager designed for <I>Hyprland</I>, a dynamic tiling Wayland compositor. It simplifies the process of discovering, installing, managing, and updating plugins that extend <I>Hyprland</I>'s functionality. Users can easily add new plugins from various Git repository sources, enable or disable them as needed, update installed ones, and remove those no longer desired. <b>hyprpm</b> aims to provide a streamlined experience for enhancing <I>Hyprland</I> through its vibrant plugin ecosystem, allowing users to customize their desktop environment efficiently without manual compilation or complex configuration.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>hyprpm</b> requires several build tools to be installed on the system, including <I>git</I>, <I>cmake</I>, a C++ compiler (like <I>g++</I> or <I>clang</I>), and a build system (<I>make</I> or <I>ninja</I>).<br>Plugins are third-party code and can potentially cause instability or security risks if not sourced from trusted repositories.<br>Plugins are specific to <I>Hyprland</I>'s API; breaking changes in <I>Hyprland</I> might affect plugin compatibility.


title: PLUGIN SOURCES
content:
<b>hyprpm</b> primarily sources plugins directly from Git repositories. Users must provide a valid URL to the plugin's source code for the <I>add</I> command to function correctly. This decentralized approach allows for a wide variety of community-contributed plugins.


title: BUILD DEPENDENCIES
content:
For plugin compilation, users must have a C++ compiler (such as <I>g++</I> or <I>clang</I>), <I>cmake</I>, and a build system (like <I>make</I> or <I>ninja</I>) installed on their system. These tools are essential for transforming the plugin's source code into a runnable binary.


title: RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT
content:
Plugins managed by <b>hyprpm</b> are loaded by the <I>Hyprland</I> Wayland compositor itself. A running <I>Hyprland</I> session is necessary for plugins to be initialized and function correctly, as they extend <I>Hyprland</I>'s core capabilities.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>hyprpm</b> emerged as a community-driven solution to streamline the management of plugins for the <I>Hyprland</I> Wayland compositor. Prior to its existence, installing <I>Hyprland</I> plugins often involved manual cloning of Git repositories, compiling source code, and correctly placing compiled binaries. It fills a crucial gap, providing a centralized and automated way to handle the plugin lifecycle, similar to how package managers operate for system-wide software, but tailored specifically for the <I>Hyprland</I> ecosystem.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>i3-msg</b> [<i>-q</i>] [<i>-t &lt;type&gt;</i>] [<i>-v</i>] [<i>-s &lt;socket_path&gt;</i>] <i>&lt;command&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-q</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables quiet mode, suppressing output.<br><br><b><i>-t &lt;type&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the message type to send (e.g., 'command', 'workspace', 'version').<br><br><b><i>-v</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version of i3-msg and exits.<br><br><b><i>-s &lt;socket_path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to a specific i3 IPC socket instead of the default.<br><br><b><i>&lt;command&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The i3 command string to execute (e.g., 'focus left', 'workspace 2').<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
i3 is a dynamic tiling window manager for X11, designed from scratch to be simple, fast, and keyboard-driven. Unlike traditional floating window managers, i3 arranges windows into a non-overlapping grid, maximizing screen space and reducing mouse usage. It features a tree-based layout, allowing windows to be split horizontally or vertically, and organized into tabbed or stacked containers. Configuration is done via a plain text file, offering extensive customization for keybindings, workspace behavior, and application rules. <br><br>While "i3" refers to the window manager itself, its command-line interaction utility, <b>i3-msg</b>, is crucial for sending commands to a running i3 instance, controlling layouts, moving windows, and querying information. i3 is popular among developers and power users for its performance, transparency, and predictable behavior.


title: CAVEATS
content:
i3 has a relatively steep learning curve for new users due to its keyboard-centric design and tiling paradigm. It requires manual configuration via a plain text file, which can be daunting initially. As an X11-native window manager, it does not directly support Wayland; users seeking a similar experience on Wayland typically use <b>sway</b>.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
i3 is configured entirely through a plain text file, typically located at <i>~/.config/i3/config</i>. This file defines keybindings, workspace names, application startup rules, and bar settings, offering extensive control over the window manager's behavior.


title: INTER-PROCESS COMMUNICATION (IPC)
content:
i3 features a powerful IPC interface, allowing external programs and scripts to interact with the running i3 instance. This enables dynamic control, status reporting, and integration with other utilities, forming the basis for commands like <b>i3-msg</b>.


title: WORKSPACES AND CONTAINERS
content:
Windows in i3 are organized within virtual workspaces, which can be navigated and named. Within workspaces, windows are managed in a tree of containers, which can be split horizontally or vertically, and transformed into stacked or tabbed layouts, providing flexible window arrangement.


title: HISTORY
content:
i3 was created by Michael Stapelberg and initially released around 2009. It emerged as an alternative to existing tiling window managers like <b>wmii</b> and <b>dwm</b>, aiming for a cleaner codebase, easier configuration, and a more robust Inter-Process Communication (IPC) mechanism. Its focus on simplicity, speed, and clear documentation, combined with its tree-based window management, quickly established it as a popular choice among Linux power users and developers.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>i3-scrot</i> is not a standard binary but a common community script. Its exact syntax can vary.<br>A typical synopsis based on common implementations is:<br><b>`i3-scrot [OPTION...]`</b><br><br>Common usage examples:<br><b>`i3-scrot -f`</b> <i>(Full screen)</i><br><b>`i3-scrot -w`</b> <i>(Active window)</i><br><b>`i3-scrot -s`</b> <i>(Select region)</i><br><b>`i3-scrot -fwc`</b> <i>(Full screen, copy to clipboard, send notification)</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-f, --full</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Captures the entire screen.<br><br><b>-w, --window</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Captures the currently active window.<br><br><b>-s, --select</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows the user to interactively select a region to capture (e.g., using slop or grim-shot).<br><br><b>-c, --clipboard</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Copies the resulting image or its path to the system clipboard (requires <i>xclip</i> or <i>wl-copy</i>).<br><br><b>-n, --notify</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a desktop notification upon successful screenshot capture (requires <i>dunst</i> or <i>notify-send</i>).<br><br><b>-d N, --delay N</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delays the screenshot capture by N seconds. Useful for capturing menus or tooltips.<br><br><b>-o DIR, --output DIR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative output directory for saving the screenshot.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>i3-scrot</i> is a popular community-driven script designed to streamline the screenshot process within the <i>i3 Window Manager</i> environment.<br>It typically acts as a wrapper around a core screenshot utility like <i>scrot</i>, <i>maim</i>, or <i>grim</i>, adding features crucial for a seamless i3 workflow.<br>Common functionalities include taking full-screen screenshots, capturing the active window, or allowing interactive selection of a region. <br>Beyond just capturing, <i>i3-scrot</i> scripts often automatically save the image to a predefined directory (e.g., <i>~/Pictures/Screenshots/</i> with a timestamped filename), copy the image path or the image data directly to the system clipboard (using tools like <i>xclip</i> or <i>wl-copy</i>), and provide visual or audio notifications upon successful capture (via <i>dunst</i> or <i>notify-send</i>).<br>Its primary purpose is to provide a single, easily bindable command in <i>i3</i>'s configuration to perform comprehensive screenshot actions with minimal user intervention.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>`i3-scrot`</b> command is typically a user-created or community-maintained script, not a standard executable distributed with core Linux utilities or i3 itself. <br>As such, its exact functionality, available options, and dependencies can vary significantly between different implementations. <br>Users often customize these scripts to fit their specific needs and preferred screenshot tools (e.g., <i>scrot</i>, <i>maim</i>, <i>grim</i>) and helper utilities (e.g., <i>xclip</i>, <i>dunst</i>, <i>slop</i>). <br>Always consult the specific script's source code or documentation if you encounter unexpected behavior or need to understand its precise options.


title: TYPICAL I3 CONFIGURATION
content:
To use <b>`i3-scrot`</b>, it is commonly bound to a key combination in the <i>i3 configuration file</i> (typically <i>~/.config/i3/config</i>). <br>For example, to take a full-screen screenshot when pressing `Print Screen` and save it with a timestamp:<br><b>`bindsym Print exec --no-startup-id i3-scrot -f`</b><br><br>Or to select a region with `Shift+Print Screen` and copy to clipboard:<br><b>`bindsym Shift+Print exec --no-startup-id i3-scrot -sc`</b><br><br>Ensure the <i>i3-scrot</i> script is executable and located in your system's `PATH` (e.g., <i>~/bin/</i> or <i>/usr/local/bin/</i>).


title: DEPENDENCIES
content:
The functionality of <i>i3-scrot</i> heavily relies on several external utilities. Common dependencies include:<br><br><i>Screenshot Tools</i>: <b>scrot</b>, <b>maim</b>, or <b>grim</b> (for Wayland).<br><i>Clipboard Tools</i>: <b>xclip</b> (for X11) or <b>wl-copy</b> (for Wayland).<br><i>Notification Daemons</i>: <b>dunst</b> or <b>notify-send</b>.<br><i>Selection Tools</i>: <b>slop</b>, <b>xrectsel</b>, or <b>grim-shot</b> for interactive region selection.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of <i>i3-scrot</i> emerged organically within the <i>i3 Window Manager</i> community. <br>As users adopted <i>i3</i> for its lightweight and tiling nature, a common need arose for a quick, keyboard-driven way to take screenshots that integrated well with the desktop environment. <br>Instead of a single, officially maintained binary, users began crafting shell scripts that wrapped existing screenshot tools like <i>scrot</i>, adding features like automatic saving, clipboard integration, and desktop notifications. <br>These scripts, often shared on forums, GitHub gists, or dotfiles repositories, converged on similar naming conventions and functionalities, with <i>i3-scrot</i> becoming a de facto standard name for such a utility.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The term <b>i386</b> is not a direct executable command in Linux but an architecture identifier.<br>It is commonly encountered as an output or a parameter in various system contexts, for example:<br><br><b>$</b> <i>uname -m</i><br><i>i386</i> (or <i>i686</i>, <i>x86_64</i> depending on system)<br><br><b>$</b> <i>dpkg --add-architecture i386</i> (for multi-arch systems)<br><br><b>$</b> <i>file /bin/ls</i><br><i>/bin/ls: ELF 32-bit LSB executable, Intel 80386, version 1 (SYSV), dynamically linked, interpreter /lib/ld-linux.so.2, for GNU/Linux 2.6.32, BuildID[sha1]=..., stripped</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The term <b>i386</b> does not accept command-line parameters as it is not an executable program. It serves as a static identifier or a value in various system configurations and commands that refer to the 32-bit x86 architecture.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term <b>i386</b> in Linux does not refer to a direct executable command, but rather serves as a crucial identifier for the 32-bit Intel 80386 microprocessor architecture and its compatible successors within the x86 family. This includes CPUs like the 486, Pentium, and newer Intel/AMD processors when operating in 32-bit mode.<br><br>It is commonly encountered in various system contexts:<br><ul><li>As the output of commands like <i>uname -m</i> or <i>arch</i>, indicating the system's underlying architecture.</li><li>In package management systems (e.g., APT, YUM, DNF) to specify 32-bit packages or repositories (e.g., <i>package.i386.deb</i>).</li><li>When configuring system boot parameters or compiling software, to target a 32-bit environment.</li><li>For cross-compilation, where a build system targets a 32-bit i386 environment.</li></ul>While modern Linux systems are predominantly 64-bit (<i>x86_64</i> or <i>amd64</i>), <b>i386</b> remains relevant for backward compatibility, legacy applications, specific embedded systems, or multi-architecture setups allowing 32-bit applications to run on 64-bit operating systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Not a Direct Command:</b> The most common misconception is treating <b>i386</b> as a standalone command to be executed from the shell; it is an architectural identifier.</li><li><b>32-bit Limitation:</b> Software compiled for <b>i386</b> can only utilize 32-bit memory addressing and CPU registers, even when running on a 64-bit processor.</li><li><b>Performance:</b> While 32-bit binaries can run on 64-bit systems (via multi-arch), they might not fully leverage the performance advantages or additional instruction sets of 64-bit CPUs.</li><li><b>Modern Systems:</b> Most modern Linux distributions default to 64-bit (<i>x86_64</i>) installations, making native <b>i386</b> systems less common. Multi-arch support is typically used to run 32-bit applications on 64-bit systems.</li></ul>


title: MULTI-ARCHITECTURE SUPPORT
content:
Modern Linux distributions, especially Debian/Ubuntu and Fedora/Red Hat derivatives, offer robust multi-architecture (multi-arch) support. This allows a 64-bit (<i>x86_64</i>) system to install and run 32-bit (<b>i386</b>) libraries and applications alongside their 64-bit counterparts. This is essential for compatibility with older software, specific closed-source applications, or environments like Wine, which often rely on 32-bit components.


title: I386 VS. I686
content:
While <b>i386</b> serves as a general identifier for the 32-bit x86 architecture, you might also encounter <i>i686</i>. Technically, <i>i686</i> refers to the Pentium Pro processor and later (including Pentium II, III, 4, and Core series), which introduced additional instruction set extensions and performance optimizations over the original 386/486. Compiling for <i>i686</i> can yield slightly more optimized binaries for newer 32-bit x86 CPUs, while <b>i386</b> ensures the broadest 32-bit x86 compatibility. Most distributions use <b>i386</b> as the base architecture for 32-bit packages for maximum compatibility.


title: HISTORY
content:
The term <b>i386</b> originates from the Intel 80386 microprocessor, released in 1985. This was the first 32-bit processor in the widely adopted x86 family, marking a significant transition from 16-bit architectures. Linux, being developed for PC hardware, embraced this 32-bit instruction set, and <b>i386</b> became the de facto standard designation for 32-bit x86-compatible systems.<br><br>Subsequent processors like the 486, Pentium, and later Core CPUs maintained backward compatibility with the 386 instruction set, ensuring that binaries compiled for <b>i386</b> would run on newer hardware. Thus, <b>i386</b> became a generic term for the 32-bit x86 architecture.<br><br>With the advent of 64-bit processors (AMD64/x86-64) around 2003, the new <i>x86_64</i> or <i>amd64</i> designation emerged to distinguish 64-bit systems from the older 32-bit <b>i386</b> standard. Despite the prevalence of 64-bit systems, <b>i386</b> remains an important identifier for backward compatibility and multi-architecture support in Linux distributions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>logout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Logs out of the current i3 session.<br><br><b>reboot</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reboots the system.<br><br><b>shutdown</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shuts down the system completely.<br><br><b>suspend</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suspens the system to RAM.<br><br><b>lock</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Locks the screen, typically using <i>i3lock</i>.<br><br><b>hibernate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hibernates the system to disk.<br><br><b>poweroff</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alias for the shutdown action.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>i3exit</i> is not a standalone binary but typically a shell script designed to facilitate various session and system power management actions within the <i>i3 window manager</i> environment. It serves as a convenient wrapper, often integrated with interactive menus like <i>dmenu</i> or <i>rofi</i>, to allow users to easily choose between actions such as logging out, rebooting, shutting down, suspending, or locking the screen. The script abstracts the underlying commands (e.g., <i>systemctl</i>, <i>loginctl</i>, <i>i3lock</i>) required for these operations, providing a consistent interface for <i>i3</i> users. Its flexibility allows users to define custom actions or integrate it seamlessly into their <i>i3</i> keybindings for quick access to critical system functions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>i3exit</i> is generally a user-contributed or custom shell script, not a standard distribution binary. Its functionality heavily depends on the underlying system utilities (e.g., <i>systemctl</i>, <i>loginctl</i>, <i>i3lock</i>) being available and correctly configured on the user's system. The specific actions and their implementations may vary significantly between different versions or user-customized scripts. Users might need to install <i>i3lock</i> separately for screen locking functionality.


title: CUSTOMIZATION AND INTEGRATION
content:
<i>i3exit</i> scripts are highly customizable. Users often modify them to suit their specific needs, such as adding custom prompts, integrating different screen lockers, or defining unique actions. They are typically bound to specific key combinations within the <i>i3</i> configuration file (e.g., <b>bindsym $mod+Shift+e exec --no-startup-id i3exit</b>) to provide quick access to the exit menu or direct actions.


title: DEPENDENCIES
content:
The proper functioning of <i>i3exit</i> often relies on the presence of other command-line tools. For system power actions, <i>systemctl</i> or <i>loginctl</i> (part of <i>systemd</i>) are commonly used. For screen locking, <i>i3lock</i> is the most frequent choice, but others like <i>xss-lock</i> combined with <i>slock</i> or <i>betterlockscreen</i> can also be utilized depending on the script's implementation. Interactive menus typically use <i>dmenu</i> or <i>rofi</i>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of <i>i3exit</i> emerged organically within the <i>i3 window manager</i> community as a practical solution for unifying system exit operations. Given that <i>i3</i> itself is a minimalistic window manager, it doesn't bundle such high-level system control utilities. Users and developers created various shell scripts named <i>i3exit</i> (or similar) to provide a consistent interface for session management (logout) and system power control (reboot, shutdown, suspend, lock). These scripts became common examples in <i>i3</i> configuration files and community forums, demonstrating how to leverage external tools like <i>dmenu</i> and <i>systemd</i>'s <i>systemctl</i>/<i>loginctl</i> for a complete desktop experience. Its development is decentralized, driven by community needs and contributions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>i3lock</b> [<i>options</i>]<br><br>Example: <b>i3lock --color=000000 --image=~/lock_screen.png</b><br>Example: <b>i3lock --blur=5 --show-failed-attempts</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information and exit.<br><br><b><b>--color=</b><<i>hex_color</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a solid background color (e.g., <i>000000</i> for black). Must be a 6-digit hexadecimal RGB value.<br><br><b><b>--image=</b><<i>path_to_image</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use an image file as the background. Supported formats depend on loaded libraries (e.g., PNG, JPEG).<br><br><b><b>--tiling</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Tile the image specified by <b>--image</b> across the screen instead of scaling it.<br><br><b><b>--blur=</b><<i>radius</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a blur effect to the background, optionally with a specified <i>radius</i> (default is 5 if no radius is given).<br><br><b><b>--pixelate</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a pixelation effect to the background before displaying.<br><br><b><b>--no-fork</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not fork into the background; run <b>i3lock</b> in the foreground. Useful for debugging or scripting.<br><br><b><b>--override-dpms</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevent the display from going into power-saving mode (DPMS) while locked.<br><br><b><b>--no-indicator</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not display the password input indicator circle or line.<br><br><b><b>--ignore-empty-password</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Require a password even if the user account has an empty password set.<br><br><b><b>--no-unlock-indicator</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not show any visual feedback (e.g., wrong password, unlock status) other than the background.<br><br><b><b>--no-bell</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable the system bell sound on key presses or authentication errors.<br><br><b><b>--line-uses-color</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Color the password indicator line based on input status (e.g., green for correct, red for incorrect).<br><br><b><b>--keylayout</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the current keyboard layout near the input indicator.<br><br><b><b>--show-failed-attempts</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the number of incorrect password attempts after each failed try.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
i3lock is a simple, modern, and secure screen locker for the X Window System. Designed to be lightweight and robust, it effectively locks your screen, preventing unauthorized access to your session. When activated, i3lock typically presents a blank screen, an image, or a blurred view of your current desktop, prompting for your user password. It integrates well with the <i>i3</i> window manager but operates independently.<br><br>i3lock aims for simplicity and reliability, focusing on its core function of locking the screen without unnecessary features, making it a preferred choice for users seeking a no-frills security solution. It supports various visual customizations, like background colors, images, and blurring effects, while maintaining a strong emphasis on security by disallowing arbitrary GUI elements and relying on PAM for authentication.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While robust, <b>i3lock</b> is a client-side X11 application; a compromised X server or root access can potentially bypass it. It relies on PAM for authentication, so proper PAM configuration is crucial. As an X11-specific tool, it does not directly operate on Wayland, though compatibility layers might exist. It does not handle system suspend/hibernate actions directly, requiring external scripting or systemd hooks for pre-sleep locking.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
<b>i3lock</b> leverages PAM (Pluggable Authentication Modules) for user authentication. This allows it to integrate seamlessly with system-wide authentication configurations, including LDAP, local user accounts, and other PAM modules.


title: SECURITY FOCUS
content:
Unlike some screen lockers, <b>i3lock</b> is designed with a strong security focus. It avoids complex graphical elements like buttons or input fields, reducing the attack surface. It draws directly to the screen and relies on the X server's security features for input capture.


title: INTEGRATION WITH DESKTOP ENVIRONMENTS
content:
While primarily associated with the <i>i3</i> window manager, <b>i3lock</b> can be used with any X11-based desktop environment or window manager. Users often integrate it with keyboard shortcuts or scripts that automatically lock the screen after inactivity.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>i3lock</b> was developed as a part of the <i>i3</i> window manager project by Michael Stapelberg and other contributors. Its design philosophy mirrors <i>i3</i>'s emphasis on simplicity, correctness, and speed. It has been actively maintained, focusing on stability and security, and has gained significant popularity due to its lightweight nature and strong integration within the <i>i3</i> ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c <config_file>, --config <config_file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file path instead of the default locations (e.g., <i>~/.config/i3status/config</i> or <i>/etc/i3status.conf</i>).<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message with command usage and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the <i>i3status</i> version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>i3status</i> is a lightweight command-line utility designed to generate status information for the <i>i3</i> window manager's status bar, <i>i3bar</i>, and its Wayland counterpart, <i>Swaybar</i>. It continuously monitors various system metrics such as CPU usage, memory consumption, disk space, network activity, battery status, date, and time.<br><br>This information is then formatted, typically as a JSON stream, and piped to <i>i3bar</i> or <i>Swaybar</i> for real-time display in a user's status line. The behavior and modules of <i>i3status</i> are highly configurable through a plain-text configuration file, allowing users to customize which information is displayed, its format, and update intervals. Its primary purpose is to provide essential system insights in a minimalist and efficient manner, integrating seamlessly into the <i>i3</i> and <i>Sway</i> desktop environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>i3status</i> is specifically designed for the <i>i3</i> and <i>Sway</i> window managers and their respective bars. While its JSON output can be parsed by other tools, it's not a general-purpose system monitoring application for other desktop environments.<br><br>Its functionality is heavily reliant on a correct configuration file; misconfigurations can lead to no output or errors. Direct customization of modules is not possible via command-line arguments; all module-specific settings must be defined within the configuration file.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
By default, <i>i3status</i> looks for its configuration file in <i>~/.config/i3status/config</i> or <i>/etc/i3status.conf</i>. This file defines which modules (e.g., CPU, memory, disk, battery, time) are active, their display format, update intervals, and module-specific settings (e.g., paths for disk usage, network interfaces).


title: OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
<i>i3status</i> primarily outputs a continuous stream of system information. The modern and recommended output format is JSON, which allows <i>i3bar</i> (and other parsers) to interpret the data structure efficiently. An older plain-text format is also supported but less flexible.


title: INTEGRATION WITH I3BAR
content:
<i>i3status</i> is typically run by piping its output directly to <i>i3bar</i>. For example, in an <i>i3</i> configuration file, a bar block might contain <b>status_command i3status</b>. This setup ensures that <i>i3status</i> continuously feeds updated information to the bar, which then renders it.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>i3status</i> was developed as an integral part of the <i>i3</i> window manager project, created to provide a native, efficient, and minimalist status bar solution. Its development has focused on simplicity and stability, avoiding feature bloat while ensuring essential system information is readily available.<br><br>Initially, it supported plain text output, but later transitioned to a more robust and extensible JSON output format, which allows for more complex styling and interaction with <i>i3bar</i>. Its design philosophy aligns with <i>i3</i>'s goal of being 'lean and mean,' making it a popular choice for users who prefer lightweight and highly customizable environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows version information and exits.<br><br><b><b>-T</b>, <b>--temperature</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays only the current CPU package temperature.<br><br><b><b>-C</b>, <b>--cstates</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays only the current C-state residency information.<br><br><b><b>-P</b>, <b>--pstates</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays only the current P-state frequencies and Turbo Boost status.<br><br><b><b>-w</b> <i>&lt;delay&gt;</i>, <b>--wait</b> <i>&lt;delay&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the update delay in seconds (default is 1 second).<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--output</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects output to the specified file.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--log</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Logs raw data in a machine-readable format to the output file.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--update-once</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Updates once and exits without entering interactive mode.<br><br><b><b>-A</b>, <b>--auto-detect</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to auto-detect C-state ranges for older CPUs.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--plain</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs data to stdout without using the ncurses interactive display.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--package-only</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows only package-level C-state residency, not per-core.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--reset-cstates</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resets C-state counters (requires <b>--update-once</b>).<br><br><b><b>-F</b>, <b>--full-freq</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays individual frequencies for all cores.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>i7z</i> is a powerful command-line utility designed to provide real-time monitoring of Intel Core i3, i5, i7, and Xeon CPUs. It offers deep insights into your processor's operation by displaying crucial metrics such as core frequencies, actual and nominal speeds, package and individual core temperatures, and detailed C-state (idle power states) residency percentages. It also shows P-state (performance states) activation and whether Turbo Boost is active. <br><br>By reading Model Specific Registers (MSRs) directly, <i>i7z</i> gives users a granular view of how their CPU behaves under various loads and idle conditions. This makes it an invaluable tool for performance tuning, power consumption analysis, diagnosing thermal throttling, or simply understanding your CPU's dynamic behavior.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>i7z</i> requires <b>root</b> privileges (or the <b>CAP_SYS_RAWIO</b> capability) to access the CPU's Model Specific Registers (MSRs). Ensure the <b>msr</b> kernel module is loaded (e.g., <b>sudo modprobe msr</b>). <br><br>It is designed specifically for Intel Core series (i3/i5/i7) and some Xeon processors and will not work on AMD CPUs or older Intel architectures. Compatibility can vary with different kernel versions and hardware configurations. For scripting purposes, use options like <b>-u</b> or <b>-p</b> to get non-interactive output.


title: DEPENDENCIES
content:
To function correctly, <i>i7z</i> relies on the <b>msr</b> kernel module (which provides access to CPU MSRs) and the <b>ncurses</b> library for its interactive terminal interface. Ensure these are available on your system.


title: INTERPRETING OUTPUT
content:
The output of <i>i7z</i> typically shows:<br><b>Core Frequencies:</b> Actual clock speed and nominal speed of each core.<br><b>Temperatures:</b> CPU package temperature and individual core temperatures.<br><b>C-States (C0-C10):</b> Percentage of time the CPU spends in various idle power-saving states. <b>C0</b> is the active state; higher C-states (e.g., C3, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10) represent deeper sleep states with increased power savings.<br><b>P-States:</b> Current performance state, often indicating the CPU frequency multiplier and whether Turbo Boost is active.<br><b>BCLK:</b> Base Clock frequency of the CPU, which affects the final core frequency.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>i7z</i> was primarily developed by <i>Roman Mamedov</i> to monitor the behavior of Intel's then-new Core i-series processors, specifically focusing on observing C-state transitions and Turbo Boost functionality. It emerged as a specialized tool when general monitoring utilities didn't offer such granular, low-level CPU insights. Its development helped users understand how modern Intel CPUs manage power and performance dynamically, and it has been maintained to support newer architectures.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>No standard synopsis available for <b>ia</b>.</i><br>As <b>ia</b> is not a recognized Linux command, a typical command synopsis cannot be provided.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>ia</b> does not appear to be a standard utility available on most Linux distributions. There is no widely recognized manual page or common package that provides a command named <b>ia</b>. It is possible that <b>ia</b> might be a custom script, an alias, a command from a highly specialized or niche software package, or a typo for another common command like <b>id</b>, <b>ip</b>, <b>iostat</b>, or <b>inxi</b>.<br><br>Users looking for a command named <b>ia</b> should verify their system's installed packages or check if it's a locally defined alias or script. As a result, a detailed analysis of its functionalities, parameters, and history cannot be provided as it does not have a common, documented behavior across Linux systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As <b>ia</b> is not a standard Linux command, its behavior, if it exists on a specific system, would be entirely dependent on its custom implementation. There are no general caveats applicable.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b>, <b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for the <b>ibmcloud</b> command or a specific subcommand.<br><br><b><b>--version</b>, <b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the current version of the <b>ibmcloud</b> CLI.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug mode, providing verbose debug information during command execution.<br><br><b><b>--trace</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables HTTP trace mode, displaying detailed HTTP request and response information for API calls.<br><br><b><b>--quiet</b>, <b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses verbose output, showing only essential information or errors.<br><br><b><b>--output</b> <<i>FORMAT</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output format for command results, such as <i>JSON</i>, <i>text</i>, or <i>table</i>.<br><br><b><b>--color</b> <<i>true|false</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables or disables colored output in the terminal.<br><br><b><b>--force</b>, <b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces an operation to proceed without requiring user confirmation.<br><br><b><b>--timeout</b> <<i>TIMEOUT_IN_SECONDS</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum timeout duration for API requests in seconds.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ibmcloud</b> command-line interface (CLI) serves as the primary tool for interacting with and managing various resources, services, and applications within the IBM Cloud ecosystem. It provides a unified, consistent experience for developers and administrators to provision, configure, and monitor their cloud assets directly from the terminal. The CLI is designed with a core component that handles fundamental operations like authentication, region/resource group targeting, and plugin management.<br><br>Its functionality is extensively extended through a modular <i>plugin architecture</i>. Users can install specific plugins for services such as Kubernetes Service (IKS), Cloud Object Storage (COS), Functions (Cloud Functions/OpenWhisk), Code Engine, and many more, enabling fine-grained control over a vast array of IBM Cloud offerings. This approach ensures that the CLI remains lightweight while allowing users to customize their toolset based on their specific needs. It supports scripting and automation, making it an essential tool for CI/CD pipelines and infrastructure-as-code practices on IBM Cloud.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Authentication Required:</b> Most commands require prior authentication using <b>ibmcloud login</b> to access IBM Cloud resources.<br><b>Plugin Dependency:</b> Functionality for specific services is often provided by plugins that must be installed separately (e.g., <b>ibmcloud plugin install kubernetes-service</b>).<br><b>Targeting:</b> Commands typically operate within a specific region and/or resource group, which can be set using <b>ibmcloud target</b>.<br><b>Internet Connectivity:</b> An active internet connection is necessary to interact with IBM Cloud APIs.<br><b>Version Compatibility:</b> Ensure the CLI and installed plugins are kept up-to-date for full feature access and compatibility.


title: MODULAR PLUGIN ARCHITECTURE
content:
The <b>ibmcloud</b> CLI is built on a robust plugin system. The core CLI provides foundational commands (e.g., login, target, plugin management), while service-specific functionalities are delivered through separate plugins (e.g., <b>ibmcloud plugin install kubernetes-service</b>). This design keeps the core CLI lightweight and allows users to install only the components they need, ensuring flexibility and efficient resource usage.


title: AUTHENTICATION AND TARGETING
content:
Users must authenticate using the <b>ibmcloud login</b> command before managing resources. The CLI also supports targeting specific regions, resource groups, or Cloud Foundry organizations/spaces via the <b>ibmcloud target</b> command, ensuring commands operate within the desired scope of the IBM Cloud environment.


title: SCRIPTING AND AUTOMATION
content:
The <b>ibmcloud</b> CLI is highly scriptable, making it ideal for automation tasks, continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) pipelines, and infrastructure-as-code workflows. Its consistent command structure and support for various output formats (like <i>JSON</i>) facilitate programmatic interaction.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>ibmcloud</b> CLI evolved as a unified successor to earlier IBM Cloud management tools, notably integrating and expanding upon the capabilities of the Cloud Foundry CLI (<b>cf CLI</b>). It was introduced to provide a single, consistent interface for managing IBM's increasingly diverse portfolio of cloud services, extending beyond just Cloud Foundry applications to encompass IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS offerings. Its development emphasized a modular plugin architecture to ensure extensibility and adaptability to the rapid growth of IBM Cloud services, solidifying its position as the official and recommended command-line interface for IBM Cloud interactions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>ibmcloud login</I> [<B>--apikey</B> <I>API_KEY</I> | <B>-u</B> <I>API_KEY</I>] [<B>--sso</B>] [<B>--origin</B> <I>IDENTITY_PROVIDER</I>] [<B>--sso-url</B> <I>SSO_URL</I>] [<B>--profile</B> <I>PROFILE_NAME</I>] [<B>--client-id</B> <I>CLIENT_ID</I>] [<B>--api</B> <I>API_ENDPOINT</I> | <B>-a</B> <I>API_ENDPOINT</I>] [<B>--region</B> <I>REGION</I> | <B>-r</B> <I>REGION</I>] [<B>--account</B> <I>ACCOUNT_ID</I>] [<B>--resource-group</B> <I>RESOURCE_GROUP</I> | <B>-g</B> <I>RESOURCE_GROUP</I>] [<B>--no-all-account-commands</B>] [<B>--skip-ssl-validation</B>] [<B>-h</B> | <B>--help</B>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>--apikey</B> <I>API_KEY</I> | <B>-u</B> <I>API_KEY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Authenticates using a provided IBM Cloud API key. Ideal for automation.<br><br><b><B>--sso</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiates a Single Sign-On (SSO) login flow, prompting for a browser-based authentication.<br><br><b><B>--origin</B> <I>IDENTITY_PROVIDER</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the identity provider for SSO, e.g., <I>ibmid</I>, <I>github</I>.<br><br><b><B>--sso-url</B> <I>SSO_URL</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom SSO URL, typically used for private or custom identity configurations.<br><br><b><B>--profile</B> <I>PROFILE_NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses a named authentication profile from your IBM Cloud CLI configuration.<br><br><b><B>--client-id</B> <I>CLIENT_ID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the client ID for OAuth flows, typically used in advanced scenarios.<br><br><b><B>--api</B> <I>API_ENDPOINT</I> | <B>-a</B> <I>API_ENDPOINT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the IBM Cloud API endpoint URL to connect to, e.g., <I>https://cloud.ibm.com</I>.<br><br><b><B>--region</B> <I>REGION</I> | <B>-r</B> <I>REGION</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Targets a specific IBM Cloud region after successful login (e.g., <I>us-south</I>).<br><br><b><B>--account</B> <I>ACCOUNT_ID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Targets a specific account ID if you have access to multiple accounts.<br><br><b><B>--resource-group</B> <I>RESOURCE_GROUP</I> | <B>-g</B> <I>RESOURCE_GROUP</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Targets a specific resource group after successful login.<br><br><b><B>--no-all-account-commands</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents listing commands that apply to all accounts, streamlining command output.<br><br><b><B>--skip-ssl-validation</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips SSL certificate validation. <I>Use with extreme caution and only in non-production environments.</I><br><br><b><B>-h</B> | <B>--help</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for the login command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `ibmcloud login` command is the primary method for authenticating the IBM Cloud Command Line Interface (CLI) session. It establishes a secure connection to the IBM Cloud environment, allowing users to interact with and manage their resources. Upon successful login, the CLI stores an authentication token, enabling subsequent commands to be executed without requiring re-authentication until the token expires. This command supports various authentication methods, including interactive login with a username and password, API key-based authentication for automation, and single sign-on (SSO) for enterprise environments. It's crucial for setting up the context for all subsequent IBM Cloud CLI operations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The literal command name for logging into IBM Cloud is <B>ibmcloud login</B> (with a space), not <B>ibmcloud-login</B> (with a hyphen). If <I>ibmcloud-login</I> is used, it likely refers to a custom script or alias.<br>Using <B>--skip-ssl-validation</B> is highly discouraged in production environments due to significant security risks.<br>Storing API keys directly in scripts or command history is not recommended. Consider using environment variables, secure vaults, or IBM Cloud CLI profiles for better security practices.<br>Authentication tokens obtained via login have an expiration period, after which re-authentication is required.


title: DEFAULT API ENDPOINT
content:
The default API endpoint for IBM Cloud is <I>https://cloud.ibm.com</I>. If you are operating in a private cloud environment or a specialized deployment, you may need to explicitly specify the correct endpoint using the <B>--api</B> option.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE CONFIGURATION
content:
Many login parameters can be configured using environment variables, which can be useful for scripting and automation without exposing sensitive information directly on the command line. Examples include <I>IC_API_KEY</I>, <I>IC_API_ENDPOINT</I>, and <I>IC_REGION</I>.


title: POST-LOGIN TARGETING
content:
After successfully logging in, it's often necessary to set your target account, region, resource group, or Cloud Foundry organization/space using the <B>ibmcloud target</B> command. This ensures that subsequent CLI commands operate within the correct context.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>ibmcloud</I> CLI has evolved significantly since its inception, succeeding older CLIs like the <I>bluemix</I> (bx) CLI. The <I>ibmcloud login</I> command has been the cornerstone of user authentication since its introduction, providing a unified and consistent way to access IBM Cloud resources. Over time, new authentication methods like API key support, enhanced SSO options, and profile management have been integrated to accommodate diverse user needs and automation requirements, continuously improving security and usability.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ibus</b> [<i>COMMAND</i>] [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><br>The <b>ibus</b> command serves as a client to control and query the <b>ibus-daemon</b>. Common uses include starting, stopping, restarting the daemon, listing available input engines, switching engines, or launching the graphical configuration tool.<br><br><i>Examples:</i><br><b>ibus</b> start<br><b>ibus</b> exit --force<br><b>ibus</b> list-engines<br><b>ibus</b> engine pinyin<br><b>ibus</b> setup


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available commands and options for the <b>ibus</b> client.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <b>ibus</b> client.<br><br><b>start</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the <b>ibus-daemon</b> process if it's not already running. This command is often handled automatically by desktop environments upon login.<br><br><b>exit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Terminates the running <b>ibus-daemon</b> process. Can be combined with <i>--force</i> for immediate termination.<br><br><b>--force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used as an option for the <i>exit</i> command (e.g., <b>ibus exit --force</b>) to force the <b>ibus-daemon</b> to terminate immediately, bypassing graceful shutdown procedures.<br><br><b>restart</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restarts the <b>ibus-daemon</b>. This is useful for applying configuration changes, reloading input engines, or resolving minor issues without a full logout/login.<br><br><b>list-engines</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all currently installed and available input method engines on the system, showing their IDs and descriptions.<br><br><b>engine [ENGINE_ID]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the current input method engine to the specified <i>ENGINE_ID</i>. For example, <b>ibus engine pinyin</b> would select the Pinyin input method if available.<br><br><b>setup</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Launches the graphical configuration tool for <b>ibus</b>, allowing users to add/remove input methods, configure hotkeys, manage preferences, and set up various input behaviors.<br><br><b>panel</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Launches or brings to focus the <b>ibus</b> language panel, which typically appears as a system tray icon or a floating window for quick input method switching and status display.<br><br><b>address</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the D-Bus address of the running <b>ibus-daemon</b>. This information can be useful for debugging or for other applications to programmatically interact with <b>ibus</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>ibus</b> (Intelligent Input Bus) is an open-source input method framework for Linux and Unix-like operating systems. It provides a flexible and powerful architecture for users to input various characters, especially those from East Asian languages (like Chinese, Japanese, Korean) and other complex scripts. <b>ibus</b> acts as a middle-layer between your applications and the actual input method engines (IMEs), allowing seamless switching between different input methods such as Pinyin, Cangjie, Hangul, or diverse keyboard layouts.<br><br>It was developed to overcome the limitations of older input method frameworks like SCIM and IIIMF, offering improved stability, better integration with modern desktop environments (like GNOME and KDE), and a more robust D-Bus-based communication protocol. <b>ibus</b> ensures that applications communicate with the input method effectively, providing features like candidate word lists, dynamic word suggestions, and character conversion. It is widely adopted across major Linux distributions as the default input method system, making it a crucial component for internationalized computing. Its modular design allows developers to create new input engines easily, further extending its capabilities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>ibus</b> primarily integrates with desktop environments based on X11 or Wayland, such as GNOME, KDE, XFCE, etc. Proper functioning requires the correct setting of environment variables like <b>GTK_IM_MODULE</b>, <b>QT_IM_MODULE</b>, and <b>XMODIFIERS</b>, which are usually managed by the desktop session.<br><br>Conflicts can arise if multiple input method frameworks (e.g., <b>ibus</b> and <b>fcitx</b>) are simultaneously configured to run in the same user session, leading to unpredictable behavior, input issues, or inconsistent language panel displays.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
For applications to correctly use <b>ibus</b>, specific environment variables must be set in the user's session. These are typically configured by the desktop environment or login manager, but manual setup might be needed in minimalist setups or for debugging:<br><i>- <b>GTK_IM_MODULE=ibus</b></i>: Specifies IBus as the input method for GTK-based applications.<br><i>- <b>QT_IM_MODULE=ibus</b></i>: Specifies IBus as the input method for Qt-based applications.<br><i>- <b>XMODIFIERS=@im=ibus</b></i>: A general X input method specification, crucial for X Window System applications.


title: D-BUS INTEGRATION
content:
<b>ibus</b> heavily relies on the D-Bus message bus system for communication between its components. The <b>ibus-daemon</b> acts as a central hub, facilitating communication with various input method engines and client applications (e.g., web browsers, text editors). This modern architecture provides a robust and flexible way to manage input events, linguistic processing, and interaction across the entire system.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>ibus</b> was initiated by Red Hat in 2007, aiming to provide a modern, robust, and extensible input method framework for Unix-like operating systems. It was designed as a successor to older, less maintainable frameworks like SCIM (Smart Common Input Method) and IIIMF (Internet Intranet Input Method Framework).<br><br>Leveraging D-Bus for inter-process communication, <b>ibus</b> offered improved stability, better integration with modern desktop environments, and a more modular design that made it easier for developers to create new input engines. Its development led to its adoption as the default input method system in many major Linux distributions, including Fedora and Ubuntu, significantly enhancing internationalization capabilities for users worldwide.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>No direct synopsis for a standard `ical` command exists.</i><br>Interaction with iCalendar data on Linux typically involves specialized command-line tools, each with its own syntax and capabilities. Users would invoke specific commands for calendar clients or synchronization tools, such as:<br><br><code>khal [OPTIONS] [COMMAND] [ARGUMENTS]</code><br><br><code>calcurse [OPTIONS]</code><br><br><code>vdirsyncer [COMMAND] [OPTIONS]</code><br>These commands are designed to interact with iCalendar data and often provide functionalities like viewing events, adding new ones, or synchronizing with remote calendars.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-f</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an iCalendar (`.ics`) file for processing (common in parsing tools).<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;source&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a calendar source, often a local directory or remote URL (common in calendar clients).<br><br><b><b>--date</b> <i>&lt;date&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter or operate on events for a specific date or date range (common in viewing tools).<br><br><b><b>--add</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiate adding a new event or task (common in interactive calendar clients).<br><br><b><b>--sync</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronize local calendar data with a remote server (common in synchronization tools).<br><br><b><b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a list of events or tasks (common in viewing tools).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The name `ical` refers primarily to the <i>iCalendar</i> format (files typically ending in `.ics`), which is a widely used standard for exchanging calendaring and scheduling information. Contrary to what its name might suggest, `ical` is <b>not</b> a standard, widely-distributed command-line utility found in most Linux distributions. Users often search for an `ical` command expecting a direct tool to view, create, or manage calendar events from the terminal using this format. Instead, interacting with iCalendar data on Linux typically involves a variety of specialized command-line calendar clients, synchronization tools, or scripting solutions that parse and manipulate `.ics` files. These tools offer functionalities ranging from simple event display to complex synchronization with remote calendar servers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The most significant caveat is that `ical` is <b>not</b> a standard Linux command. Users looking for direct `ical` functionality should instead explore existing command-line calendar clients (like `khal`, `calcurse`) or synchronization utilities (`vdirsyncer`), or consider scripting with iCalendar parsing libraries available in languages like Python.


title: UNDERSTANDING THE ICALENDAR FORMAT
content:
The <i>iCalendar</i> format is a plain text file format for calendaring and scheduling data. It defines a set of properties for events (VEVENT), to-dos (VTODO), journal entries (VJOURNAL), and free/busy time (VFREEBUSY). These properties include details like summary, location, start/end times, recurrence rules, and alarms. Files using this format typically have the `.ics` extension.


title: COMMON INTERACTION METHODS
content:
On Linux, interacting with iCalendar data often involves:<br>1. <b>Dedicated CLI Calendar Clients:</b> Tools like <code>khal</code> or <code>calcurse</code> provide a full-fledged terminal interface for managing calendars.<br>2. <b>Synchronization Tools:</b> Utilities like <code>vdirsyncer</code> synchronize local iCalendar files with remote CalDAV servers.<br>3. <b>Scripting:</b> Using programming language libraries (e.g., Python's <code>icalendar</code>) to parse, generate, or manipulate <code>.ics</code> files programmatically.


title: HISTORY
content:
The `ical` designation most directly relates to the <i>iCalendar</i> standard (RFC 5545, formerly RFC 2445), developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). This format gained prominence in the late 1990s as a vendor-neutral way to exchange calendar data. While the format became ubiquitous, a single, universal `ical` command-line tool did not emerge as a standard part of Linux distributions. Instead, various open-source projects developed independent command-line clients and libraries to interact with iCalendar data, driven by the need for terminal-based productivity and synchronization capabilities.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>icotool</b> [OPTIONS] [FILE...]<br><br>Examples of usage:<br><b>icotool -l</b> <I>iconfile.ico</I><br><b>icotool -x</b> <I>iconfile.ico</I> <b>--save-dir</b> <I>extracted_icons</I><br><b>icotool -c -o</b> <I>new_icon.ico</I> <b>--icon-size</b> 32 <b>--bit-depth</b> 24 <I>image1.png image2.png</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List the contents of the specified ICO or CUR files.<br><br><b><b>-x</b>, <b>--extract</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extract images from the specified ICO or CUR files.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a new ICO or CUR file from input images.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <I>FILE</I>, <b>--output</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output file name for creation or extraction.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <I>N</I>, <b>--index</b>=<I>N</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Select a specific image index for extraction or creation.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <I>FILE</I>, <b>--input</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify input image files for creation (can be multiple).<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <I>N</I>, <b>--icon-size</b>=<I>N</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the output icon/cursor image size during creation (e.g., 16, 32, 48).<br><br><b><b>-b</b> <I>N</I>, <b>--bit-depth</b>=<I>N</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the bit depth for the output image during creation (e.g., 24, 32).<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <I>TYPE</I>, <b>--type</b>=<I>TYPE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the type of file to create: <i>icon</i> or <i>cursor</i>.<br><br><b><b>--save-dir</b>=<I>DIR</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the directory where extracted images should be saved.<br><br><b><b>--names</b>=<I>FORMAT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control the naming format of extracted files.<br><br><b><b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing files without prompting.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produce more detailed output.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>icotool</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>icoutils</i> package designed for working with Microsoft Windows icon (<b>.ico</b>) and cursor (<b>.cur</b>) files. It provides functionalities to list the contents of such files, extract individual images from them, and create new ICO or CUR files from various input images (e.g., PNG, BMP). This tool is crucial for developers and users needing to manage Windows-specific graphical resources on non-Windows operating systems, facilitating cross-platform asset management. It supports multiple image formats, bit depths, and sizes, making it versatile for icon and cursor creation and manipulation. <i>icotool</i> helps bridge the gap for handling these proprietary formats within a Linux environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <i>ico</i> is not a standard or widely recognized standalone utility in typical Linux distributions. This analysis primarily refers to <i>icotool</i>, a component of the <i>icoutils</i> package, which is the actual command-line tool for manipulating Windows ICO and CUR files. Users might encounter <i>ico</i> as an alias or a custom script on specific systems, but for general use and installation, <i>icotool</i> is the correct command.


title: CLARIFICATION ON 'ICO' COMMAND
content:
It's important to note that a standalone command named 'ico' is not standard on most Linux distributions. The functionality typically associated with managing <b>.ico</b> files is provided by the <b>icotool</b> utility, which is part of the <b>icoutils</b> package. If you encountered 'ico' on a specific system, it might be a custom alias, a symlink, or a very niche script. For general purposes, always refer to and install <b>icotool</b> when needing to work with Windows icon and cursor files.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>icotool</i> emerged as part of the <i>icoutils</i> project, specifically designed to address the need for manipulating Windows icon and cursor files on Unix-like operating systems. This suite of tools fills a crucial gap for cross-platform development and content management, allowing Linux users to create, extract, and inspect <b>.ico</b> and <b>.cur</b> files without relying on Windows-specific software. Its development has been driven by the need for open-source tools to handle these proprietary binary formats, contributing to the broader ecosystem of free software utilities.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b><I>icontopbm</I></b> is a utility from the <i>Netpbm</i> family of graphics conversion tools. Its primary function is to transform a binary <i>X11 icon file</i> (typically with a `.icon` extension) into a <i>Portable BitMap (PBM)</i> image format.<br><br>X11 icon files are specific binary structures used in the X Window System for representing small graphic elements. The resulting PBM file is a simple, monochrome (black and white) image format that is widely portable and easily manipulated by other <i>Netpbm</i> tools, such as `pbmscale` or `pbmtoascii`.<br><br>This command is often used as part of a larger image processing pipeline to extract and convert X11 icons for further viewing, editing, or integration into different image contexts.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Input must be a valid <i>X11 icon file</i>. The command does not support other icon formats (e.g., Windows ICO).<br>The output <i>PBM</i> format is strictly monochrome. If the original X11 icon contains color information, it will be converted to black and white, potentially losing fidelity or undergoing a default dithering process.


title: INPUT/OUTPUT HANDLING
content:
By default, <b><I>icontopbm</I></b> reads its input from standard input if no <i>inputfile</i> is specified. The resulting <i>PBM</i> image is always written to standard output. This behavior makes it ideal for use in shell pipelines, allowing its output to be directly piped as input to other commands (e.g., `icontopbm icon.x11 | pbmtopng > icon.png`).


title: PORTABILITY OF PBM
content:
The choice of <i>PBM</i> as the output format ensures maximum portability. <i>PBM</i> is a very simple and well-documented format, making it easy for other programs to read and process. It serves as a good intermediate format for conversion to more complex image types like PNG, JPEG, or GIF using other <i>Netpbm</i> utilities.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b><I>icontopbm</I></b> is an integral part of the <i>Netpbm</i> project, which originated from the <i>PBMplus</i> package created by Jef Poskanzer. <i>Netpbm</i> is a long-standing and widely used toolkit for handling graphics formats on Unix-like systems. <b><I>icontopbm</I></b> specifically addresses the niche need of converting X11-specific icon files, reflecting the package's comprehensive approach to image format interoperability in the Unix environment.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>iconv</I> [<b>-f</b> <I>FROMCODE</I>] [<b>-t</b> <I>TOCODE</I>] [<b>-o</b> <I>OUTPUTFILE</I>] [<b>-c</b>] [<b>-s</b>] [<b>--verbose</b>] [<b>--list</b>] [<I>INPUTFILE</I> ...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-f</b> <I>FROMCODE</I>, <b>--from-code=</b><I>FROMCODE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the original character encoding of the input. If omitted, the system's current locale encoding is used.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <I>TOCODE</I>, <b>--to-code=</b><I>TOCODE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the desired character encoding for the output. If omitted, the system's current locale encoding is used.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <I>OUTPUTFILE</I>, <b>--output=</b><I>OUTPUTFILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the converted output to <I>OUTPUTFILE</I> instead of standard output.<br><br><b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Omit characters that are invalid in the input encoding, or cannot be converted to the output encoding. Without this option, an error would occur.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--silent</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress warnings about invalid characters or failed conversions. Errors will still be reported.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print progress information during conversion, useful for large files or debugging.<br><br><b><b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all known character set encodings supported by the <I>iconv</I> implementation on your system.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>iconv</I> is a powerful command-line utility used to convert character encodings of files or standard input from one encoding to another. Its primary purpose is to ensure text data can be correctly interpreted and displayed across different systems or applications that use varying character sets. For instance, it can transform a file encoded in ISO-8859-1 to UTF-8, which is crucial for internationalization and compatibility.<br><br>The command operates by reading the input stream, translating each character according to the specified source (<b>--from-code</b>) and target (<b>--to-code</b>) encodings, and then writing the converted output. If no input file is specified, it reads from standard input; if no output file is specified, it writes to standard output. <I>iconv</I> is based on the <b>iconv()</b> C library function, which is a standard part of most Unix-like operating systems' C libraries (like glibc). This ensures robust support for a wide range of character sets, although the exact set of supported encodings can vary by system. It also provides options for handling invalid characters, such as omitting them or issuing warnings, making it a flexible tool for various text processing tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When converting between character sets, especially from a wider encoding (like UTF-8) to a narrower one (like ASCII), some characters may not have an equivalent representation. <I>iconv</I> will either omit them (with <b>-c</b>) or replace them with a default character, potentially leading to data loss. It's crucial to correctly identify the source encoding, as an incorrect <b>-f</b> option can result in garbled output. The set of supported encodings depends on the specific <I>iconv</I> implementation available on your system, usually provided by the C library (e.g., glibc).


title: FINDING SUPPORTED ENCODINGS
content:
To see a comprehensive list of all character encodings that your system's <I>iconv</I> supports, you can run the command: <br> <b>iconv --list</b><br> This list is extensive and includes various aliases for common encodings.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
One of the most frequent uses of <I>iconv</I> is converting legacy text files to the widely adopted UTF-8 encoding. For example, to convert a file named <I>old_file.txt</I> from ISO-8859-1 to UTF-8 and save it as <I>new_file.txt</I>: <br> <b>iconv -f ISO-8859-1 -t UTF-8 old_file.txt -o new_file.txt</b><br> When piping output from other commands, <I>iconv</I> can be used as a filter: <br> <b>cat input.txt | iconv -f UTF-16 -t UTF-8 > output.txt</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>iconv</I> emerged as a standard component of Unix-like systems through the POSIX standard, specifically from the X/Open Portability Guide (XPG4) in the early 1990s. Its underlying C library function, <b>iconv()</b>, provides the core character set conversion capabilities. This standardization ensured that character encoding conversion became a portable and reliable feature across various Unix implementations, vital for handling international text data as computing globalized. It has been a stable and fundamental utility in Linux and other Unix-like operating systems since its inception.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--output=<i>FILE</i> or -o <i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output cache file. By default, it writes to the system's standard <i><b>iconv</b></i> cache location.<br><br><b>--add-dir=<i>DIRECTORY</i> or -r <i>DIRECTORY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>DIRECTORY</i> to the list of directories scanned for <i>gconv</i> modules.<br><br><b>--clean or -c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes old <i>gconv</i> modules that are no longer referenced in the configuration.<br><br><b>--prefix=<i>PATH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses <i>PATH</i> as the prefix for searching module directories and the default cache file.<br><br><b>--sysconfdir=<i>DIR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the system configuration directory. Used to find the main <i>gconv-modules</i> definition file.<br><br><b>--verbose or -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the process.<br><br><b>--silent or -s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all non-error output.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i>.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> is a utility used to manage and rebuild the <i><b>iconv</b></i> character set conversion cache file, typically named <i>gconv-modules.cache</i>. <br><br> This cache file is crucial for the <i><b>iconv</b></i> function (part of the GNU C Library, <i>glibc</i>) to efficiently locate and perform character encoding conversions between different character sets (e.g., UTF-8, ISO-8859-1, EUC-JP). <br><br> When new character set modules are installed, or the system's <i>glibc</i> is updated, <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> should be run to regenerate this cache. It scans predefined directories, like <i>/usr/lib/gconv</i>, for available conversion modules (<i>.so</i> files) and their definitions, then compiles this information into a quick-lookup cache. <br><br> Running <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> ensures that all installed character set conversions are recognized and available for applications using <i><b>iconv</b></i>, preventing potential errors or incomplete conversions due to missing module information. It's usually invoked automatically by package managers when <i>glibc</i> or related locale packages are updated.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Running <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> typically requires root privileges as it modifies system-wide configuration files in directories like <i>/usr/lib/gconv</i>. <br> Incorrect usage or interruption during its execution could potentially corrupt the <i><b>iconv</b></i> cache, leading to character set conversion failures for applications on the system. <br> It is usually invoked automatically by package management systems after <i>glibc</i> updates or installation of new locale packages, so manual intervention is rarely needed unless issues arise.


title: CACHE LOCATION AND PURPOSE
content:
The primary file managed by <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> is the <i>gconv-modules.cache</i> (or <i>iconv.cache</i> on some systems), typically located in <i>/usr/lib/gconv</i> or <i>/usr/local/lib/gconv</i>. This binary cache file allows <i><b>iconv</b></i> functions to quickly look up available character set conversions without parsing text configuration files each time, significantly improving performance.


title: TRIGGERING CACHE REBUILD
content:
While <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> can be run manually, it is most often executed automatically by package managers (e.g., <i>apt</i>, <i>dnf</i>, <i>pacman</i>) as part of post-installation scripts for <i>glibc</i> or locale-related packages. This ensures the <i><b>iconv</b></i> cache is always up-to-date with the installed character set modules.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> utility is an integral part of the GNU C Library (<i>glibc</i>), which provides fundamental system calls and library functions for Linux. Its development is intertwined with the evolution of <i>glibc</i>'s internationalization (<i>i18n</i>) and localization (<i>l10n</i>) support. <br><br> The underlying <i><b>iconv</b></i> framework itself is based on POSIX.1-2001 and XPG4 specifications, aiming to provide a standardized way for applications to convert text between different character encodings. <br><br> <i><b>iconvconfig</b></i> emerged as a necessary tool to manage the dynamic loading and caching of these conversion modules, ensuring efficient and robust character set conversion capabilities across the system as new locales and encoding standards were introduced and updated.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-g, --group</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print only the effective group ID.<br><br><b>-G, --groups</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print all group IDs (real, effective, and supplementary).<br><br><b>-n, --name</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print name instead of number for -ugG options.<br><br><b>-r, --real</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print real ID instead of effective ID for -ugG options.<br><br><b>-u, --user</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print only the effective user ID.<br><br><b>-Z, --context</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print only the security context (e.g., SELinux context).<br><br><b>-z, --zero</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delimit entries with NUL characters, useful for scripting.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b><I>id</I></b> command in Linux is used to display user and group identity information for the current user or a specified <i>USERNAME</i>.<br><br>By default, when invoked without any arguments, <b><I>id</I></b> shows the real user ID (RUID), effective user ID (EUID), and saved user ID (SUID), along with the real group ID (RGID), effective group ID (EGID), saved group ID (SGID), and all supplementary group IDs that the user belongs to.<br><br>This command is crucial for understanding the security context of a process or a user. It helps in diagnosing permission issues by revealing exactly which user and group IDs a process is operating under. The distinction between real and effective IDs is particularly important in scenarios involving setuid/setgid programs, where the effective ID changes to that of the file owner while the real ID remains that of the invoking user.<br><br><b><I>id</I></b> is part of the GNU Core Utilities, making it a fundamental and universally available tool on most Linux distributions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When a program is executed with the <i>setuid</i> or <i>setgid</i> bit set, its effective user/group ID changes to that of the file owner/group, while the real user/group ID remains that of the user who executed it. The <b><I>id</I></b> command helps differentiate these, but understanding the implications of effective vs. real IDs is crucial for security. The <b>-Z</b> option for security context is specific to systems with Mandatory Access Control (MAC) frameworks like SELinux or AppArmor; it will not show meaningful output on systems without these enabled.


title: UNDERSTANDING IDS
content:
<b>RUID/RGID</b>: Real User/Group ID, identifies the actual user/group who started the process.<br><b>EUID/EGID</b>: Effective User/Group ID, determines the process's permissions for accessing resources. This can change for <i>setuid/setgid</i> programs.<br><b>SUID/SGID</b>: Saved User/Group ID, used by a process to temporarily revert its effective ID to the real ID and then restore the effective ID.


title: EXAMPLES
content:
To show your own IDs:<br><code>id</code><br><br>To show IDs for a specific user (e.g., '<i>root</i>'):<br><code>id root</code><br><br>To get only your effective username:<br><code>id -un</code><br><br>To list all groups a user (e.g., '<i>myuser</i>') belongs to, by name:<br><code>id -Gn myuser</code>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b><I>id</I></b> command has been a standard utility in Unix-like operating systems for decades, providing a simple way to query user and group identities. Its inclusion in GNU Core Utilities ensures its widespread availability and consistent behavior across Linux distributions. Over time, options like <b>-Z</b> were added to accommodate new security features (e.g., SELinux), and others like <b>-a</b> became default behavior, simplifying the command's usage. Its core functionality, however, remains unchanged: to display identity information.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<I>whoami(1)</I>, <I>groups(1)</I>, <I>logname(1)</I>, <I>users(1)</I>, <I>getent(1)</I>, <I>passwd(5)</I>, <I>group(5)</I>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>id3tag</i> [ <b>-a</b> <i>artist</i> ] [ <b>-A</b> <i>album</i> ] [ <b>-t</b> <i>title</i> ] [ <b>-c</b> <i>comment</i> ] [ <b>-g</b> <i>genre</i> ] [ <b>-y</b> <i>year</i> ] [ <b>-T</b> <i>track</i> ] [ <b>-v</b> | <b>--version</b> ] [ <b>-L</b> | <b>--list-genres</b> ] [ <b>--remove-v1</b> ] [ <b>--remove-v2</b> ] <i>&lt;file ...&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b> <i>artist</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>artist</i> field of the ID3 tag.<br><br><b><b>-A</b> <i>album</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>album</i> field of the ID3 tag.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>title</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>title</i> field of the ID3 tag.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>comment</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>comment</i> field of the ID3 tag.<br><br><b><b>-g</b> <i>genre</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>genre</i> field. Can be a numeric ID (0-125 for ID3v1) or a string.<br><br><b><b>-y</b> <i>year</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>year</i> field of the ID3 tag.<br><br><b><b>-T</b> <i>track</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>track number</i> field of the ID3 tag.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <i>id3tag</i> command.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--list-genres</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all recognized <i>ID3v1 genre names</i> and their corresponding numeric IDs.<br><br><b><b>--remove-v1</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes any existing <i>ID3v1 tag</i> from the specified MP3 files.<br><br><b><b>--remove-v2</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes any existing <i>ID3v2 tag</i> from the specified MP3 files.<br><br><b><i>&lt;file ...&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more <i>MP3 files</i> on which to perform tag operations. Wildcards are supported.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>id3tag</i> is a command-line utility used for manipulating <b>ID3 tags</b> embedded within <i>MP3 audio files</i>. <br>These tags are essential metadata containers that store information such as the song's artist, title, album, year of release, genre, and comments. <br>This data is crucial for organizing music collections and enabling media players to display relevant song details. <br>The <i>id3tag</i> command empowers users to read existing tags, modify specific fields, or write entirely new tag data to MP3 files. <br>It supports both the older <b>ID3v1</b> format and a subset of the more advanced <b>ID3v2</b> frames, primarily focusing on common textual metadata. <br>It's particularly valuable in scripting environments or for users who prefer managing their music metadata through the command line, ensuring consistency and accuracy across large MP3 libraries.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>id3tag</i> command primarily offers basic <b>ID3v1</b> and limited <b>ID3v2</b> tag manipulation (common text frames like artist, title, album). <br>For advanced <b>ID3v2</b> features such as embedded album art, synchronized lyrics, or custom frames, more comprehensive tools like <i>mid3v2</i> or <i>eyeD3</i> are generally required. <br>Operations are performed by overwriting existing tag data, so it's advisable to back up files if sensitive information is involved. <br>It operates strictly from the command line and does not provide an interactive mode.


title: ID3 TAG VERSIONS
content:
<b>ID3v1 tags</b> are fixed-length (128 bytes) and typically appended to the end of an MP3 file. They support a limited set of fields: Title, Artist, Album, Year, Comment, and Genre (using numeric IDs). <br><b>ID3v2 tags</b> are more flexible, variable-length, and are usually placed at the beginning of an MP3 file. They support a much wider array of 'frames' (fields), including multiple artists, album art, lyrics, and various other detailed metadata, overcoming the limitations of <b>ID3v1</b>.


title: GENRE HANDLING
content:
When setting the genre using the <b>-g</b> option, you can provide either a <i>numeric ID</i> (corresponding to <b>ID3v1</b> standard genres, which can be listed with <b>--list-genres</b>) or a <i>text string</i>. <br>If a text string is used, <i>id3tag</i> will typically write this information into an <b>ID3v2</b> tag, as <b>ID3v1</b> only supports numeric genre codes. <br>It's important to be aware of which tag version is being affected, especially if aiming for strict <b>ID3v1</b> compatibility.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>id3tag</i> has been a long-standing utility in the Linux ecosystem for managing MP3 metadata, particularly useful before the widespread adoption of comprehensive graphical music managers. <br>Its development focused on providing a straightforward command-line interface for the then-prevalent <b>ID3v1</b> standard, with incremental additions for basic <b>ID3v2</b> support. <br>Its simplicity and efficiency made it a staple for shell scripting and batch processing of MP3 collections, remaining a solid choice for users who prefer minimalist, scriptable tools.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all ID3 tags found in the specified MP3 file(s).<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--list-frames</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all known ID3v2 frames supported by the utility.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--delete-all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes all ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags from the specified MP3 file(s).<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--strip-v1</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Strips only ID3v1 tags from the specified MP3 file(s).<br><br><b><b>-D</b>, <b>--delete-frame=</b><i>FRAMEID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes a specific ID3v2 frame (e.g., 'APIC' for picture) by its four-character ID.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--comment=</b><i>DESCRIPTION:TEXT:LANG</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a comment frame, allowing a description, text, and optional language code.<br><br><b><b>-g</b>, <b>--genre=</b><i>GENRE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the genre tag, using either a genre name or an ID.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--artist=</b><i>ARTIST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the artist tag for the MP3 file.<br><br><b><b>-A</b>, <b>--album=</b><i>ALBUM</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the album tag for the MP3 file.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--title=</b><i>TITLE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the song title tag for the MP3 file.<br><br><b><b>-y</b>, <b>--year=</b><i>YEAR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the year tag for the MP3 file.<br><br><b><b>-T</b>, <b>--track=</b><i>TRACK</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the track number tag (e.g., '5/12').<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--picture=</b><i>FILENAME:DESCRIPTION:TYPE:FORMAT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds or replaces a picture frame (album art). TYPE can be a number or name.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--encoding=</b><i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the text encoding for new frames (e.g., <i>latin1</i>, <i>utf16</i>, <i>utf8</i>).<br><br><b><b>-C</b>, <b>--convert</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts existing ID3v2 tags to the ID3v2.4 format.<br><br><b><b>-R</b>, <b>--raw-tag</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows editing of raw tag frames by ID and content; for advanced use.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--uniq-id=</b><i>ID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a unique file identifier frame.<br><br><b><b>-x</b>, <b>--no-backup</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the creation of a backup file when modifying MP3s.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information for <b>id3v2</b>.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>id3v2</b> command is a powerful command-line utility for managing ID3 tags within MP3 audio files. These tags are crucial for storing metadata such as the artist, song title, album, year of release, genre, and track number, making music collections organized and easily searchable.<br><br>While it can interact with both the older ID3v1 and the more advanced ID3v2 tag formats, its primary strength lies in manipulating ID3v2 tags. ID3v2 tags offer significant improvements over their predecessors, including support for various text encodings, embedded album art, and a flexible frame-based structure for storing diverse information. Users can employ <b>id3v2</b> to display existing tag information, add new metadata fields, modify specific entries, or completely remove tags from MP3 files. It is widely used by command-line enthusiasts, script developers, and music archivists who need precise control over their MP3 metadata, ensuring compatibility and rich information display across various media players and devices.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When modifying tags, <b>id3v2</b> typically creates a backup of the original file (e.g., <i>filename.mp3~</i>) unless the <b>--no-backup</b> option is used. Users should be aware of potential encoding issues when dealing with non-ASCII characters or converting between different ID3v2 versions, as older media players might not fully support ID3v2.4 features. Always back up important files before making extensive modifications.


title: DEFAULT TAG VERSION
content:
By default, <b>id3v2</b> creates and modifies ID3v2.4 tags. While it can read older versions like ID3v2.3, users may need to convert tags explicitly if compatibility with very old media players is a concern, as some might not fully support the 2.4 standard.


title: TAG FRAMES
content:
ID3v2 tags are composed of various 'frames', each holding specific pieces of metadata (e.g., <i>TIT2</i> for title, <i>TPE1</i> for artist, <i>APIC</i> for album art). <b>id3v2</b> allows direct manipulation of these frames by their four-character IDs using options like <b>-D</b> or <b>-R</b>, offering fine-grained control over the tag structure.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>id3v2</b> command emerged as part of the <i>id3lib</i> project, designed to provide robust command-line manipulation of ID3v2 tags. Its development paralleled the evolution of the ID3v2 standard, which introduced features like improved character encoding, extensible frame types, and support for embedded album art, overcoming the limitations of the older ID3v1 format. It has been a staple for Linux users managing MP3 collections through the command line or scripts.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>idea</b> command is <b>not a standard utility</b> found in typical Linux distributions. It does not correspond to a common command-line tool or core system utility.<br><br>If encountered, it likely refers to a <i>custom script</i>, a very specific third-party application, or a <i>typo</i> (e.g., for <b>id</b>, which prints user and group IDs, or referring to an Integrated Development Environment like <i>IntelliJ IDEA</i>, which is an application, not a shell command).<br><br>Therefore, specific details regarding its syntax, parameters, or historical development <b>cannot be provided</b> as it is not a recognized part of the standard Linux command set.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As the <b>idea</b> command is <b>not a standard Linux utility</b>, its behavior, existence, and purpose would depend entirely on its specific, non-universal implementation. It should not be expected to be present on most systems.


title: CLARIFICATION ON 'IDEA'
content:
It's important to differentiate between a command-line utility and applications that might have 'IDEA' in their name (like <i>IntelliJ IDEA</i>). The latter are graphical applications, not commands executed directly in the shell. Users commonly search for 'idea' in relation to Integrated Development Environments.


title: HISTORY
content:
N/A: As <b>idea</b> is not a standard Linux command, there is <b>no documented history</b> of its development or widespread usage within the Linux ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-format</b> <i>string</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom format string for the output, allowing users to extract specific pieces of metadata (e.g., <i>%w</i> for width, <i>%h</i> for height, <i>%f</i> for filename).<br><br><b><b>-ping</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a fast identification, only reading the image dimensions and type without decoding pixel data. Useful for quick checks on large images.<br><br><b><b>-verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays copious amounts of information about the image, including various profiles, histograms, and detailed file properties.<br><br><b><b>-size</b> <i>geometry</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optimizes image identification based on a specified image size. Useful for large images to avoid reading the entire file.<br><br><b><b>-quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all warnings and errors, providing a cleaner output, particularly useful in scripts.<br><br><b><b>-regard-warnings</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Normally warnings do not exit with an error status. This option causes warnings to be treated as errors, causing <b>identify</b> to exit with a non-zero status.<br><br><b><b>-list</b> <i>type</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists information about supported features or configurations, such as image formats (<i>-list format</i>), delegates, or fonts.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>identify</b> command, part of the ImageMagick suite, is a powerful utility for analyzing and describing the format and characteristics of image files. It can report a wide array of information including the image type, dimensions (width and height), depth, colorspace, compression, resolution, and various profiles (like EXIF, IPTC, and ICC color profiles). This command is essential for anyone working with digital images, especially in scripting or automated workflows where image metadata needs to be extracted or verified. It supports a vast number of image formats, making it a versatile tool for inspecting everything from common JPEG and PNG files to more specialized formats like TIFF or RAW images.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>identify</b> is a part of the ImageMagick suite, meaning it must be installed as part of ImageMagick and is not a standalone core Linux utility.<br>The command's output can be very verbose, especially with the <i>-verbose</i> option, requiring careful parsing for use in scripts. For some complex or very large images, processing can be resource-intensive.


title: SCRIPTING USAGE
content:
Due to its powerful <i>-format</i> option, <b>identify</b> is frequently used in shell scripts or other programming languages to extract specific image metadata. For example, <i>identify -format '%wx%h' image.jpg</i> will output 'widthxheight', which can be easily parsed by scripts.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>identify</b> is a core component of the ImageMagick software suite, which was first developed by John Cristy in 1987 while working at DuPont. Initially designed for processing 24-bit images on a supercomputer, ImageMagick grew into a widely-used open-source software suite for image manipulation and conversion. <b>identify</b> has been a fundamental utility from early versions, providing essential image introspection capabilities critical for various imaging tasks and workflows.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints detailed information about the image, including all available attributes and metadata.<br><br><b><b>-format</b> <i>string</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs formatted image properties according to a specified string of format codes (e.g., <code>&quot;%w %h&quot;</code> for width and height).<br><br><b><b>-ping</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Efficiently determines image characteristics (like dimensions, type) without reading the entire image data. Ideal for quick checks.<br><br><b><b>-regard-warnings</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Causes the command to exit with a zero status even if warnings are encountered during processing.<br><br><b><b>-size</b> <i>WxH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the image size before it is read from disk. Useful for raw image formats that don't embed dimensions.<br><br><b><b>-list</b> <i>type</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists supported configurations or types, such as image formats, colorspaces, or compression algorithms.<br><br><b><b>-version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the ImageMagick version number and build details.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>identify.im6</b> command, part of the ImageMagick 6 suite, is a powerful utility used to determine the format and characteristics of one or more image files.<br><br>It reads image data and outputs comprehensive textual information, including image dimensions (width and height), depth, colorspace, compression type, resolution, size on disk, and EXIF/IPTC metadata. This command is particularly useful in scripting environments where automated image processing requires prior knowledge of an image's attributes, enabling intelligent decision-making before manipulation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>.im6</b> suffix denotes this command belongs to the ImageMagick 6 series. While highly stable and widely used, its behavior and supported features may differ slightly from the newer ImageMagick 7 (often invoked as just <b>identify</b> or <b>identify.im7</b>). Users should be aware of potential incompatibilities when migrating scripts between IM6 and IM7 environments. Performance can vary significantly depending on image size and format, especially without the <b>-ping</b> option for basic metadata extraction.


title: SCRIPTING UTILITY
content:
<b>identify.im6</b> is frequently used in shell scripts and programming languages to programmatically extract image metadata. This allows for automated decision-making, such as resizing images only if they exceed certain dimensions, or converting formats based on their original type. Its output, especially with the <b>-format</b> option, is easily parseable.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
Upon successful execution, <b>identify.im6</b> typically returns an exit status of 0. A non-zero exit status indicates an error, such as an invalid image file, permission issues, or unsupported format. This behavior is crucial for error handling in automated scripts.


title: HISTORY
content:
ImageMagick, the software suite containing <b>identify</b>, was first developed by John Cristy in 1987. The <b>identify</b> utility quickly became a fundamental tool for inspecting image properties. ImageMagick 6, represented by <b>identify.im6</b>, was a predominant and stable version for many years, underpinning numerous image processing workflows on Linux systems, web servers, and in various applications globally. Its continued use is a testament to its reliability and extensive feature set.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists the device IDs of all currently connected iOS devices.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--num</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the total number of connected iOS devices.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--remote</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the device ID of a remote device by its DNS hostname. Useful for network-paired devices.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug output, providing more verbose information for troubleshooting purposes.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints usage information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idevice_id</i> is a command-line utility from the <b>libimobiledevice</b> project, a cross-platform software library that provides an interface to communicate with Apple iOS devices natively.<br><br>This specific tool's primary function is to retrieve and display the <b>Unique Device Identifier (UDID)</b> of an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch connected to the computer via USB. It plays a crucial role in scripting and automation tasks where device identification is necessary, especially when multiple devices are connected.<br><br>The command can list all connected device IDs or provide the count of connected devices, making it a versatile tool for managing iOS devices from a Linux environment. It does not require iTunes or other proprietary Apple software to be installed on the host system, relying instead on <b>usbmuxd</b> for communication.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <i>usbmuxd</i> daemon to be running on the host system for USB communication.<br>The iOS device must be connected via USB and have 'trusted' the computer (if prompted on the device).<br>The <i>--remote</i> option requires the device to be paired over Wi-Fi and discoverable by hostname.


title: TRUST DIALOG ON DEVICE
content:
When connecting an iOS device to a new computer for the first time, a "Trust This Computer?" dialog will appear on the device. You must tap "Trust" on the device for <b>idevice_id</b> (and other <i>libimobiledevice</i> tools) to function correctly and access device information.


title: DEPENDENCIES
content:
<b>idevice_id</b> relies on the <i>usbmuxd</i> (USB multiplexing daemon) for establishing communication with iOS devices over USB. Ensure that <i>usbmuxd</i> is installed and running on your system for the command to work.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, which includes <b>idevice_id</b>, began in 2007. Its goal was to provide a free and open-source library for interacting with iOS devices on non-Apple operating systems. <b>idevice_id</b> is one of the foundational utilities within this suite, offering a basic but essential function for device identification. Its development has consistently adapted to new iOS versions and device models to maintain compatibility and functionality.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--udid <UDID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Optional)</b></i> Specify the 40-character unique device identifier (UDID) of the device to operate on. If omitted, the first connected device will be used.<br><br><b>--dir <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Optional)</b></i> Specify the directory where backups are stored or restored from. Defaults to '~/.config/idevicebackup'.<br><br><b>--full</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to backup/restore)</b></i> Force a full backup instead of an incremental one, or perform a full restore.<br><br><b>--system</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to backup/restore)</b></i> Include system files in the backup or restore process. This can significantly increase backup size.<br><br><b>--encrypt</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to backup)</b></i> Encrypt the backup with a password. You will be prompted for a password unless <b>--passwd</b> is used.<br><br><b>--decrypt</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to restore)</b></i> Decrypt the backup during the restore process. Requires the password set during encryption.<br><br><b>--passwd <PASSWORD></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to encrypt/decrypt)</b></i> Provide the password for backup encryption or decryption directly on the command line. Use with caution for security reasons.<br><br><b>--no-password</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to backup)</b></i> Create a backup without password protection.<br><br><b>--reboot</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to restore)</b></i> Reboot the device automatically after a successful restore operation.<br><br><b>--ignore-errors</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><b>(Applicable to backup/restore)</b></i> Continue the backup or restore process even if errors are encountered.<br><br><b>--json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output information in JSON format, useful for programmatic parsing.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a brief help message and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information of <i>idevicebackup</i> and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idevicebackup</i> is a command-line tool included in the <i>libimobiledevice</i> suite, providing robust capabilities for managing backups of Apple mobile devices (iPhones, iPads, and iPod touches) on Linux and other non-Apple operating systems. It serves as an open-source alternative to iTunes for local device backups, enabling users to create, restore, list, and remove backups directly from the command line. This tool is invaluable for developers, power users, and anyone needing to interact with their iOS devices without relying on proprietary Apple software.<br><br>It communicates with the device via <i>usbmuxd</i>, allowing for seamless data transfer and management of backup archives. <i>idevicebackup</i> supports both incremental and full backups, as well as encryption of backups, providing a comprehensive solution for data preservation and recovery.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <i>idevicebackup</i> offers significant functionality, users should be aware of a few points:<br>1. It relies on the underlying <i>libimobiledevice</i> library, which needs to be up-to-date to support the latest iOS versions.<br>2. Backup and restore operations, especially full ones, can be time-consuming and consume considerable disk space.<br>3. It does not interact with iCloud backups; it only handles local backups.<br>4. Encryption and decryption require the correct password, which is often the device's passcode.


title: SUBCOMMANDS OVERVIEW
content:
<i>idevicebackup</i> operates via specific subcommands that define its primary action. These are typically the first argument after the <b>idevicebackup</b> command itself:<br><b><i>backup</i></b>: Initiates a new backup of the connected iOS device to the specified (or default) directory.<br><b><i>restore</i></b>: Restores a previously created backup onto a connected iOS device.<br><b><i>list</i></b>: Displays a list of all existing local backups managed by <b>idevicebackup</b> in the specified (or default) directory.<br><b><i>remove</i></b>: Deletes a specific local backup from the storage directory.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>idevicebackup</i> is an integral part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began around 2007-2008. The project was created to provide a comprehensive set of tools and libraries for interacting with Apple's iDevices on non-Apple platforms, primarily Linux. Prior to <i>libimobiledevice</i>, such interaction was largely limited to iTunes on Windows and macOS. <i>idevicebackup</i> specifically fills the gap for local backup management, empowering users with greater control over their device data outside of Apple's ecosystem.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>idevicebackup2</I> [GLOBAL_OPTIONS] COMMAND [COMMAND_OPTIONS/ARGUMENTS]<br><br><b>Available Commands:</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;backup [DIR]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;restore DIR<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;list<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;info [BACKUP_ID]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;browse BACKUP_ID<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;delete BACKUP_ID


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>backup [DIR]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a backup of the connected iOS device. If <I>DIR</I> is not specified, a default location is used.<br><br><b>restore DIR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restores the connected iOS device from the specified backup <I>DIR</I>.<br><br><b>list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all available backups managed by <I>idevicebackup2</I>.<br><br><b>info [BACKUP_ID]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about a specific backup identified by <I>BACKUP_ID</I>. If no <I>BACKUP_ID</I> is provided, it shows info for all backups.<br><br><b>browse BACKUP_ID</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows browsing the file contents of a specific backup identified by <I>BACKUP_ID</I>.<br><br><b>delete BACKUP_ID</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes a specific backup identified by <I>BACKUP_ID</I> from disk.<br><br><b>--help, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br><b>--version, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br><b>--udid UDID, -u UDID</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the 16-character UDID of the device to connect to. Useful when multiple devices are connected.<br><br><b>--debug, -d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>--disable-encryption</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables encryption for the backup process. Backups will be stored unencrypted.<br><br><b>--password PASS, -p PASS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the password for encrypted backups or for restoring from an encrypted backup.<br><br><b>--full-backup, -f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a full backup of the device, regardless of previous backups.<br><br><b>--incremental-backup, -i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs an incremental backup, only backing up changes since the last backup. This is the default behavior if neither -f nor -i is specified explicitly.<br><br><b>--system-buid BUILDSYS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the system build ID for the backup, typically for specific firmware versions.<br><br><b>--internal-path PATH</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an internal path within the backup for operations like export/import.<br><br><b>--export <SRC> <DST> <ID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports a file or directory from a backup (<I>SRC</I>) to a local destination (<I>DST</I>) from the specified backup <I>ID</I>.<br><br><b>--import <SRC> <DST> <ID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Imports a file or directory (<I>SRC</I>) into a backup (<I>DST</I>) for the specified backup <I>ID</I>.<br><br><b>--copy <SRC> <DST> <ID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Copies a file or directory from one location (<I>SRC</I>) to another (<I>DST</I>) within the specified backup <I>ID</I>.<br><br><b>--manifest</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with 'browse' or 'info' commands to show raw manifest information.<br><br><b>--display-errors, -D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed errors instead of exiting silently, useful for scripting.<br><br><b>--skip-apps, -s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips backing up application data during the backup process.<br><br><b>--passcode <PASSCODE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the device passcode to unlock the device for operations, if required.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>idevicebackup2</I> is a powerful command-line tool within the <b><I>libimobiledevice</I></b> suite, designed for managing backups and restores of iOS devices (iPhone, iPad, iPod touch) on Linux and other Unix-like operating systems. It empowers users to create full or incremental backups, restore devices from existing backups, list available backups, browse specific backup contents, and efficiently delete old backups. This tool provides a robust, open-source alternative to iTunes or Finder for users who prefer a command-line interface or operate on non-Windows/macOS platforms. It supports both unencrypted and password-protected encrypted backups, offering flexibility and security. <I>idevicebackup2</I> handles various aspects of the backup process, from file synchronization to manifest management, making it an essential utility for comprehensive iOS device management without proprietary software.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b><I>idevicebackup2</I></b> requires the <b><I>libimobiledevice</I></b> libraries and dependencies to be properly installed and configured on your system.<br>Physical access to the iOS device is often required to approve a 'Trust This Computer' prompt when connecting for the first time or after certain updates.<br>For encrypted backups, remembering the password is critical, as there is no recovery mechanism if it's lost.<br>Backup and restore operations can be time-consuming and require significant free disk space, potentially multiple times the device's storage capacity.<br>Compatibility with the very latest iOS versions might sometimes lag behind Apple's releases, requiring updates to <I>libimobiledevice</I>.<br>This tool does not interact with or manage iCloud backups.


title: BACKUP LOCATIONS
content:
By default, <I>idevicebackup2</I> stores backups in a directory structure mirroring Apple's backup format, often in <I>~/.config/idevicebackup/</I> or a user-specified path. Each backup is stored in a unique folder identified by the device's UDID and a timestamp or backup ID.


title: ENCRYPTION
content:
<I>idevicebackup2</I> supports both unencrypted and password-protected encrypted backups. When creating an encrypted backup, it's paramount to remember the password, as there is no recovery mechanism if it's lost. The password is required for subsequent restores from that backup.


title: INCREMENTAL VS. FULL BACKUPS
content:
The tool can perform incremental backups, which only store changes since the last backup, significantly saving disk space and time. This is the default behavior if not specified. Alternatively, a full backup can be forced, capturing the entire device state regardless of previous backups, which is useful for initial backups or when desiring a complete snapshot.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>idevicebackup2</I> is an integral part of the <b><I>libimobiledevice</I></b> project, an open-source initiative that provides cross-platform protocol libraries for communicating with iOS devices. This project originated around 2007-2008 as a reverse-engineering effort to interact with Apple devices without relying on iTunes or proprietary drivers. Its goal was to enable Linux and other Unix-like systems to manage iPhones, iPads, and iPods. <I>idevicebackup2</I> emerged as a crucial component for enabling local backup and restore capabilities, offering a robust and flexible alternative for users and developers on non-Apple platforms. Its development is ongoing, adapting to new iOS versions and device models.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the command's version information and exits.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>UDID</i>, <b>--udid</b> <i>UDID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the unique device identifier (UDID) of the iOS device to connect to. If omitted, the command will attempt to connect to the first available device.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output, useful for troubleshooting connection or processing issues.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>PATH</i>, <b>--extract</b> <i>PATH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts crash reports from the device and saves them to the specified <i>PATH</i> directory.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--copy</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Copies crash reports to the current working directory. This option is largely superseded by <b>--extract</b> and may be deprecated.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--symbolicate</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to symbolicate the downloaded crash reports. Requires Xcode command-line tools or `atos` utility to be installed and accessible for proper functionality.<br><br><b><b>-k</b>, <b>--keep</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keeps crash reports on the device after they have been processed or copied. By default, reports are removed from the device.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--manifest</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a manifest file (<code>.manifest</code>) containing metadata about the downloaded crash reports alongside the extracted files.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--process</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Processes crash reports. This option often works in conjunction with <b>--symbolicate</b> to prepare reports for analysis.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--remove</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes crash reports from the device after they have been processed or copied. This is the default behavior unless <b>--keep</b> is specified.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>DIR</i>, <b>--output-dir</b> <i>DIR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output directory where processed files (e.g., symbolicated reports) should be saved. Typically used with <b>--extract</b> and <b>--process</b>.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all-reports</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Downloads all available crash reports from the device, not just the latest ones. Useful for comprehensive historical analysis.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idevicecrashreport</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project. It provides functionality to interact with crash reports stored on iOS devices. Users can utilize this command to download, process (e.g., symbolicate for debugging), and optionally delete crash logs directly from an iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch. It's an essential tool for developers and system administrators needing to analyze device stability and identify issues without relying solely on Xcode or iTunes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Symbolication relies on the presence of appropriate debug symbols (dSYMs) and the `atos` utility, typically found within Xcode command-line tools. Full symbolication on non-macOS systems can be challenging. Ensure your iOS device is unlocked and 'trusted' with the host computer for the command to function correctly.


title: TRUST RELATIONSHIP
content:
For <i>idevicecrashreport</i> to function, the iOS device must establish a trust relationship with the host computer. This is typically initiated by unlocking the device and approving the 'Trust This Computer?' prompt.


title: DEPENDENCIES
content:
The command requires the `usbmuxd` daemon to be running and the `libimobiledevice` libraries to be correctly installed on the system. These provide the underlying communication framework for interacting with iOS devices.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>idevicecrashreport</i> is part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began around 2007. The project aims to provide a cross-platform protocol library to communicate with Apple's iOS devices using native protocols, independent of official Apple software. <i>idevicecrashreport</i> was developed as one of the many utilities within this suite to specifically address the need for managing device crash logs, reflecting the community's effort to provide alternatives to proprietary tools for iOS development and debugging on Linux and other non-macOS platforms.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --udid <UDID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Target a specific device by its 40-character UDID. If not specified, the command will operate on the first detected device.<br><br><b>-s, --set <DATE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the device's date and time to the specified <DATE>. The date string must be in ISO 8601 format: <i>YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ</i> (e.g., '2023-10-27T10:30:00Z').<br><br><b>-t, --time</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the device's current date and time as a Unix timestamp (seconds since epoch).<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable debug output for verbose information about the command's execution and communication with the device.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display usage information and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>idevicedate</i> command is a command-line utility from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> suite. It allows users to query and modify the system date and time of an Apple iOS device (iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch) connected via USB. This tool is particularly useful for synchronization purposes, debugging, or when an iOS device's time needs to be adjusted without direct interaction with the device's settings menu. It communicates with the device using open-source implementations of Apple's private protocols, providing a convenient way to manage device time directly from a Linux or macOS system.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The iOS device must be connected via USB and trusted by the host computer (pairing must be completed).<br>Setting the date requires the device to be unlocked or in a state where it can accept date modifications.<br>Time synchronization might be automatically handled by the iOS device itself via network time protocols (NTP), potentially overriding manually set times.<br>Ensure the correct time zone is considered when setting a date, as the device might interpret the <i>Z</i> (Zulu/UTC) suffix differently based on its own timezone settings.<br>Some iOS versions or security settings might restrict date manipulation.


title: DATE STRING FORMAT FOR SETTING
content:
When using the <b>-s</b> or <b>--set</b> option, the <DATE> string must strictly adhere to the ISO 8601 format: <i>YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ</i>.<br><b>YYYY</b>: Four-digit year (e.g., 2023)<br><b>MM</b>: Two-digit month (01-12)<br><b>DD</b>: Two-digit day (01-31)<br><b>T</b>: Separator indicating the start of the time component<br><b>HH</b>: Two-digit hour (00-23)<br><b>MM</b>: Two-digit minute (00-59)<br><b>SS</b>: Two-digit second (00-59)<br><b>Z</b>: Indicates UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). If your input is not UTC, you might need to convert it first or rely on the device's interpretation.<br><br>Example: To set the device's time to October 27, 2023, at 10:30:00 AM UTC, you would use: <i>idevicedate --set 2023-10-27T10:30:00Z</i>.


title: PREREQUISITES
content:
To use <i>idevicedate</i>, you must have the <i>libimobiledevice</i> suite installed on your Linux or macOS system. This typically involves installing a package like <i>libimobiledevice-utils</i> or a similar name depending on your distribution.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>idevicedate</i> is part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began around 2007. This project aims to provide a cross-platform protocol library to communicate with Apple's iOS devices natively. It was developed through reverse-engineering Apple's proprietary protocols, enabling Linux and other non-Apple operating systems to interact with iPhones, iPads, and iPod Touches. <i>idevicedate</i> emerged as one of the many specialized utilities within this suite, offering granular control over device settings like time, which was previously only possible via iTunes or direct device interaction.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--udid UDID, -u UDID</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <b>U</b>nique <b>D</b>evice <b>ID</b> (UDID) of the iOS device to connect to. Useful when multiple devices are connected.<br><br><b>--usb, -i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces connection to a device via <b>USB</b>. This is the default connection method.<br><br><b>--network, -n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces connection to a device via <b>network</b> (Wi-Fi sync).<br><br><b>--port PORT, -p PORT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <b>local port</b> on which <i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> should listen for incoming debugger connections. The default port is 2345.<br><br><b>--debug, -d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables <b>debug</b> output, providing more verbose information about the connection and proxying process, helpful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>--help, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a <b>help</b> message with usage instructions and available options.<br><br><b>LOCAL_PORT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A positional argument to specify the <b>local port</b> to listen on. If provided, it overrides the value set by <i>-p</i> or the default.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> is a command-line tool from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> suite, designed to facilitate remote debugging of applications on iOS devices. It acts as a bridge, creating a proxy connection between a host computer (e.g., your Linux machine) and the <i>debugserver</i> running on an attached iOS device.<br><br>When a local debugger like <i>LLDB</i> attempts to connect to the device's debugserver, <i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> listens on a specified local port, forwards the debugger's requests to the device, and relays the responses back. This enables developers to use standard debugging tools on their host machine to inspect and control processes on the iOS device, crucial for development workflows that require in-depth application analysis and breakpoint management.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>Requires the <i>libimobiledevice</i> library to be installed and the necessary udev rules (for Linux) to be in place for device detection.</li><li>The iOS device must be connected (via USB or network) and successfully paired with the host machine.</li><li>A <i>debugserver</i> process needs to be running on the iOS device for <i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> to connect to it. This debugserver is typically provided and deployed by Apple's Xcode or LLVM toolchain.</li><li>Firewall configurations on the host machine might need adjustments to allow connections to the specified <i>LOCAL_PORT</i>.</li></ul>


title: USAGE WITH LLDB
content:
To debug an iOS application using <i>LLDB</i> on a Linux host, you would typically start <i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> first, specifying a local port:<br><code>idevicedebugserverproxy 1234</code><br><br>Then, within your <i>LLDB</i> session, you connect to this proxy:<br><code>target create &lt;path/to/local/app_executable&gt;</code><br><code>process connect connect://localhost:1234</code><br><br>This establishes the debugging session, allowing <i>LLDB</i> to communicate with the <i>debugserver</i> on the iOS device.


title: DEBUGGING WORKFLOW CONTEXT
content:
This proxy is an essential piece in the larger iOS debugging puzzle. When you debug an application from Xcode, Xcode often handles the deployment of a <i>debugserver</i> binary to the device and establishes a connection. <i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> provides the non-Apple-ecosystem equivalent, enabling command-line debugging scenarios or integration with other development tools that need to talk to the iOS <i>debugserver</i> without Xcode.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>idevicedebugserverproxy</i> is a core component of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began in 2007 to provide cross-platform libraries and tools for interacting with Apple's iOS devices. Its development has been driven by the need for independent and automated control over iOS devices, particularly for tasks like application deployment and debugging outside the macOS/Xcode ecosystem. The command's functionality has remained consistent, serving as a critical bridge for remote debugging workflows from its inception.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --udid <I>UDID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the 40-character device UDID (Unique Device Identifier) to target a specific iOS device. If omitted and multiple devices are connected, the command might fail or target an arbitrary device.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the command's help message and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information about the command and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ideviceenterrecovery</b> command is a utility from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> software suite, designed to interact with Apple iOS devices. Its primary function is to force a connected iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch into Recovery Mode. Recovery Mode is a special state that allows the device to communicate with a computer for software restoration or updates, often used for troubleshooting, downgrading firmware, or preparing for jailbreaking. This command provides a programmatic way to enter this mode without requiring specific button combinations on the device itself. It's particularly useful in automated scripts or when physical access for button presses is inconvenient, streamlining tasks like firmware updates or data recovery.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The device must be powered on and in a state where it can communicate with the host computer (e.g., not DFU mode, not already bricked beyond basic communication).<br>Entering Recovery Mode will interrupt any ongoing operations on the device.<br>The device will remain in Recovery Mode until explicitly exited, typically by using <b>ideviceexitrecovery</b> or connecting to iTunes/Finder on a computer.


title: DEVICE STATE AFTER COMMAND
content:
After successfully executing <b>ideviceenterrecovery</b>, the connected iOS device will reboot and display the 'Connect to Computer' or 'Recovery Mode' screen, indicating it is waiting for further instructions from iTunes, Finder, or other <i>libimobiledevice</i> tools.


title: PREREQUISITES
content:
Ensure that the <i>libimobiledevice</i> utilities are installed on your Linux system. On most distributions, this can be done via the package manager (e.g., `sudo apt install libimobiledevice-utils` on Debian/Ubuntu, `sudo dnf install libimobiledevice` on Fedora, `sudo pacman -S libimobiledevice` on Arch Linux).


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>ideviceenterrecovery</b> is part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that provides cross-platform protocol libraries and tools for communicating with Apple's iOS devices. Developed as an alternative to Apple's proprietary MobileDevice framework, <i>libimobiledevice</i> tools, including this command, enable Linux, macOS, and Windows users to interact with iPhones, iPads, and iPods without relying on iTunes or Finder for many tasks. Its development has focused on providing robust, programmatic control over iOS device states for various purposes, from development to forensics.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --udid &lt;UDID&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Unique Device Identifier (UDID) of the iOS device to connect to. If omitted, the command attempts to connect to the first available device.<br><br><b>-i, --image &lt;IMAGE&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the disk image file (<i>.dmg</i>) to be mounted or unmounted on the device. While <i>IMAGE_FILE_PATH</i> is typically provided as a positional argument, this option explicitly designates the image file, offering an alternative way to specify it.<br><br><b>-x, --xml</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the response from the device in XML format, which can be useful for programmatic parsing of the mounting status.<br><br><b>-t, --type &lt;TYPE&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the image type. The default type is 'Developer', which is used for <i>DeveloperDiskImage.dmg</i> files. Other types might exist depending on the image's specific purpose (e.g., 'Diagnostics').<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the command's usage information and available options.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <i>ideviceimagemounter</i> utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ideviceimagemounter</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, enabling users to mount disk images, typically <i>DeveloperDiskImage.dmg</i> files, onto an iOS device. This functionality is crucial for various development and debugging tasks, such as accessing device logs, debugging applications, or performing file system operations that require specific mount points or elevated privileges. It communicates with the iOS device via the <i>usbmuxd</i> daemon and requires the device to be connected via USB and trusted (paired) with the computer. It provides an open-source alternative or supplement to Apple's proprietary tools for managing disk images on iOS devices.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>The iOS device must be connected via USB and unlocked.</li><li>The computer must be "trusted" by the iOS device (a pairing record must exist), usually established by accepting a trust dialog when connecting for the first time.</li><li>The <i>usbmuxd</i> service must be running for communication with the device.</li><li>Developer disk images are specific to iOS versions. Using an image compiled for a different iOS version may lead to errors or failure to mount.</li><li>Mounting often places the disk image into the device's RAM, consuming memory.</li></ul>


title: DEVELOPER DISK IMAGES
content:
A <i>DeveloperDiskImage.dmg</i> file is a sparse disk image provided by Apple within <i>Xcode</i>. It contains tools and frameworks necessary for debugging applications on an iOS device. These images are specific to iOS versions and are usually located within <i>Xcode</i>'s application bundle (e.g., <i>/Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/iPhoneOS.platform/DeviceSupport/&lt;iOS_VERSION&gt;/DeveloperDiskImage.dmg</i>). <i>ideviceimagemounter</i> allows these images to be mounted on a physical device, enabling debugging sessions and access to developer-specific functionalities.


title: MOUNTING PROCESS
content:
When <i>ideviceimagemounter</i> successfully mounts an image, the content of the image is made accessible on the iOS device, typically in a dedicated path like <i>/Developer</i>. This allows debugging tools (e.g., <i>lldb</i>) to function correctly over the device's debugging service. The process often involves transferring the image to the device's RAM, meaning it does not permanently reside on the device's flash storage. Unmounting typically occurs automatically upon device reboot or by re-running the command with the same image path, which can trigger an unmount operation.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ideviceimagemounter</i> is an integral part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began around 2007-2008. The project aims to provide a cross-platform protocol library to communicate with iOS devices, serving as a free alternative to Apple's proprietary tools. The need for <i>ideviceimagemounter</i> arose from the necessity to mount developer disk images, which are essential for debugging applications and performing advanced development tasks on iOS devices outside of Apple's Xcode environment. Its development underscores the community's effort to enable broader access and control over iOS devices for developers and power users.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --udid <UDID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Unique Device Identifier (UDID) of the target device to query, useful when multiple devices are connected.<br><br><b>-k, --key <KEY></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieves the value associated with a specific information key. For example, 'ProductType' or 'ProductVersion'.<br><br><b>-q, --domain <DOMAIN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fetches all key-value pairs within a specified information domain. For instance, 'com.apple.disk_usage'.<br><br><b>-x, --xml</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the retrieved information in XML format, which is useful for programmatic parsing.<br><br><b>-s, --simple</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with '--domain', outputs values in a simplified plist format, avoiding nested structures for easier readability.<br><br><b>-o, --output <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects the command's output to the specified file instead of standard output.<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output, providing more detailed information about the communication process for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the ideviceinfo utility.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the command's usage instructions and available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
ideviceinfo is a <I>command-line tool</I> from the <I>libimobiledevice project</I>. It allows users on Linux and macOS to <B>interact with and extract various details</B> from connected Apple iOS devices (iPhones, iPads, iPods) without needing proprietary software like iTunes or Finder.<br><br>The command queries the device's internal services to fetch a wide array of information, including but not limited to: the <I>device's name, product type, serial number, iOS version, unique device identifier (UDID)</I>, and network details. It can either dump all available information in a structured format (often plist-like or XML) or retrieve the value for a specific key or an entire domain of information.<br><br>This utility is invaluable for system administrators, developers, and power users who require quick access to device specifications for inventory, scripting, troubleshooting, or automated tasks. It forms a core component of the open-source ecosystem for managing iOS devices on non-Apple operating systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
To function correctly, <B>ideviceinfo</B> requires the <I>libimobiledevice</I> libraries and the <I>usbmuxd</I> daemon to be running and properly configured.<br><br>The connected iOS device must be <B>unlocked</B> and have <B>trusted the computer</B> where the command is executed, especially on first connection, by accepting the "Trust This Computer" prompt. Some information keys or domains might be inaccessible due to iOS security restrictions or specific device configurations.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<ul><li><I>System Inventory</I>: Quickly gather hardware and software details for asset management or auditing purposes.</li><li><I>Troubleshooting</I>: Verify basic device connectivity and retrieve critical information when diagnosing device issues.</li><li><I>Scripting and Automation</I>: Integrate into scripts to programmatically fetch device specifications, useful for automated testing or device provisioning workflows.</li></ul>


title: EXAMPLES
content:
<B>To dump all device information</B>: <I>ideviceinfo</I><br><B>To get the device's product type</B>: <I>ideviceinfo -k ProductType</I><br><B>To list all keys in the 'SoftwareBehavior' domain</B>: <I>ideviceinfo -q SoftwareBehavior</I><br><B>To retrieve information from a specific device by UDID</B>: <I>ideviceinfo -u 0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef -k DeviceName</I>


title: HISTORY
content:
<B>ideviceinfo</B> is an integral part of the <I>libimobiledevice</I> open-source project, initiated to provide a cross-platform (primarily Linux and macOS) API for communicating with Apple devices running iOS. The project emerged as a community effort to reverse-engineer Apple's proprietary communication protocols, offering an alternative to iTunes/Finder.<br><br>Since its inception, the utility has been continuously updated and maintained by volunteers, adapting to new iOS versions and device models. Its development reflects the ongoing need for open-source tools to interact with closed-source hardware, making it a foundational tool for iOS device management and development outside the Apple ecosystem.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ideviceinstaller</b> <i>[OPTIONS]</i> <i>[ARGUMENTS]</i><br><br>Examples:<br><i>ideviceinstaller</i> -i <i>path/to/app.ipa</i><br><i>ideviceinstaller</i> -u <i>com.example.MyApp</i><br><i>ideviceinstaller</i> -l


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b>, <b>--install</b> <i>&lt;PATH&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Installs an application bundle (.ipa file) onto the connected iOS device.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--uninstall</b> <i>&lt;BUNDLE_ID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uninstalls an application from the device using its unique bundle identifier.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list-apps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all applications currently installed on the device, including system and user apps.<br><br><b><b>-U</b>, <b>--list-user-apps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists only user-installed applications.<br><br><b><b>-S</b>, <b>--list-system-apps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists only pre-installed system applications.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--list-developer-apps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists applications installed by developers.<br><br><b><b>-g</b>, <b>--list-game-center-apps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists applications integrated with Game Center.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--reinstall</b> <i>&lt;PATH&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reinstalls an application, preserving its data if possible. Requires the path to the .ipa file.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--udid</b> <i>&lt;UDID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the 40-digit Unique Device Identifier (UDID) of the target device when multiple devices are connected.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output for troubleshooting and detailed operation logs.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options and usage information.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of <i>ideviceinstaller</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ideviceinstaller</i> is a robust command-line utility part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, designed to facilitate comprehensive application management on iOS devices (iPhones, iPads, and iPod Touches) directly from a Linux environment.<br><br>It provides functionalities such as installing new application bundles (.ipa files), uninstalling existing applications by their bundle identifiers, and listing all installed applications, categorized by user, system, developer, or Game Center integration. This tool bypasses the need for Apple's iTunes or Xcode for basic app sideloading and management, making it an invaluable asset for developers, testers, and power users who need to interact with iOS devices in a non-Apple ecosystem.<br><br>Communication is established via USB, relying on the <i>usbmuxd</i> daemon to multiplex connections. <i>ideviceinstaller</i> interacts directly with the `installd` service on the iOS device, offering a streamlined workflow for app deployment and removal, particularly useful in automated testing scenarios or for deploying custom-built applications.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ideviceinstaller</i> requires a connected iOS device via USB and for the <i>libimobiledevice</i> stack, including the <i>usbmuxd</i> daemon, to be installed and running. For installing unsigned <i>.ipa</i> files or apps outside the App Store, the device typically needs to be jailbroken or properly provisioned with developer profiles. Error messages can sometimes be generic; using the <b>--debug</b> option often provides more specific insights.


title: DEPENDENCIES
content:
The command relies on the <i>libimobiledevice</i> suite, particularly the <i>usbmuxd</i> daemon, which handles the USB communication and multiplexing for iOS devices. Ensure these are properly installed and running.


title: USAGE CONTEXT
content:
Mainly employed by software developers for testing application builds (<i>.ipa</i> files) directly on physical devices, by advanced users for sideloading custom applications, or integrated into automated scripts for streamlined device and app management workflows.


title: BUNDLE IDENTIFIER
content:
When uninstalling an application, its exact bundle identifier (e.g., 'com.apple.Maps', 'com.mycompany.MyApp') is required. This identifier can be conveniently retrieved using the <b>--list-apps</b> option.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ideviceinstaller</i> is a key component of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an independent open-source initiative providing libraries and tools to communicate with iOS devices without Apple's proprietary frameworks. Development began around 2007, aiming to offer Linux and macOS users the ability to interact with iPhones and iPod Touches, a functionality primarily exclusive to iTunes at the time. <i>ideviceinstaller</i> emerged as a practical application of <i>libimobiledevice</i>'s capabilities, enabling package management for iOS devices from the command line, crucial for developers and users interested in device customization and automation.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>idevicename</b> [<b>-u</b> <I>UDID</I>]<br><b>idevicename</b> [<b>-h</b> | <b>--help</b>]<br><b>idevicename</b> [<b>-v</b> | <b>--version</b>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-u</b>, <b>--udid</b> <I>UDID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the 40-character unique device identifier (UDID) of the iOS device to connect to. If omitted, <I>idevicename</I> will attempt to connect to the first available device.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints a brief usage message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <I>idevicename</I> utility and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>idevicename</I> command is a command-line utility part of the <I>libimobiledevice</I> suite, an open-source project designed to communicate with Apple iOS devices.<br><br>Its primary function is to retrieve the user-assigned name of a connected iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch. This name is what appears in iTunes, Finder, or in the device's own settings under 'About'.<br><br>This utility is particularly useful for scripting and automation tasks where device identification by its user-friendly name is required, rather than its unique device identifier (UDID). It relies on the <I>usbmuxd</I> daemon for establishing a connection to the device via USB.<br><br>It provides a quick and straightforward way to identify a device without requiring graphical interfaces or proprietary Apple software.


title: CAVEATS
content:
For <I>idevicename</I> to function correctly, the following conditions must be met:<br><b><I>1.</I></b> The iOS device must be physically connected to the computer via a USB cable.<br><b><I>2.</I></b> The device must be unlocked and the "Trust This Computer" prompt (if applicable) must have been accepted.<br><b><I>3.</I></b> The <I>usbmuxd</I> daemon must be running and accessible, as it mediates the USB communication with the device.<br><b><I>4.</I></b> The command only works with Apple iOS/iPadOS/tvOS devices; it does not support macOS devices.<br><b><I>5.</I></b> If multiple devices are connected and no UDID is specified with the <b>-u</b> option, the command will typically operate on the first device discovered, which may not always be predictable.


title: COMMON USAGE
content:
To retrieve the name of a single connected device, simply execute <I>idevicename</I> without any arguments. The name will be printed to standard output.<br><br>If you have multiple devices connected and know the UDID of the specific device you want to query, use the <b>-u</b> option: <b>idevicename -u <I>YOUR_DEVICE_UDID</I></b>.


title: ERROR CONDITIONS
content:
Common error messages include 'No device found', 'Device not paired', or 'Service not found'. These usually indicate that the device is not connected, not unlocked, not trusted by the computer, or that the <I>usbmuxd</I> daemon is not running or properly configured. Ensure the device is connected, unlocked, and that you've accepted the 'Trust This Computer' prompt.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>idevicename</I> command is an integral part of the <I>libimobiledevice</I> project. This open-source initiative began around 2007-2008 with the goal of providing a free and cross-platform alternative to Apple's proprietary tools for interacting with iOS devices. Its development was driven by the need for Linux and other non-macOS users to manage their iOS devices without relying on virtualization or dual-boot setups for iTunes/Finder.<br><br>The project, and thus <I>idevicename</I>, has been continuously updated to support new iOS versions, device models, and communication protocols as Apple evolves them, ensuring ongoing compatibility for device management tasks on Linux and other Unix-like systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>pair</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Establishes a new pairing record with a connected device. Requires user interaction on the iDevice to 'Trust This Computer'.<br><br><b>unpair</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes the pairing record for a specified device. Can be used with the <b>-u</b> option to target a specific UDID.<br><br><b>validate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks if an existing pairing record for a device is still valid and trusted.<br><br><b>list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all known paired devices by their UDID and name.<br><br><b>unpair-all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes all known pairing records from the host system.<br><br><b>-u, --udid <UDID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the 40-character Unique Device Identifier (UDID) of the target iDevice. Useful when multiple devices are connected or for specific actions.<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output, useful for troubleshooting pairing issues.<br><br><b>-x, --xml</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs pairing information or results in XML format, suitable for programmatic parsing.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and usage information.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version information of the <b>idevicepair</b> utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idevicepair</i> is a crucial command-line utility from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, designed to establish and manage trust relationships (pairing records) between a Linux host and an Apple iOS device (iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch). This pairing process involves a secure key exchange, which is fundamental for other <i>libimobiledevice</i> tools like <i>ideviceinstaller</i>, <i>idevicescreenshot</i>, or <i>ifuse</i> to communicate effectively with the connected device.<br><br>It handles the secure negotiation and storage of pairing certificates, allowing for persistent and authorized access. Without a successful pairing, most advanced interactions with an iOS device from a Linux system are not possible. It's an essential first step for developers, power users, or anyone looking to integrate their iDevice with a Linux environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b><i>usbmuxd</i> Daemon:</b> <i>idevicepair</i> relies on the <i>usbmuxd</i> (USB Multiplex Daemon) service running in the background. If <i>usbmuxd</i> is not running or accessible, communication with the iDevice will fail.</li><li><b>Device Interaction:</b> During the 'pair' command, the iDevice screen must be unlocked, and the user must manually tap 'Trust' on the 'Trust This Computer?' prompt for the pairing to succeed.</li><li><b>Firewall/Permissions:</b> Ensure no firewall rules block communication over the necessary USB ports or local sockets used by <i>usbmuxd</i>. Proper USB device permissions are also crucial.</li><li><b>Connectivity Issues:</b> Sometimes, physical reconnection of the USB cable or restarting the iDevice might be necessary if pairing consistently fails.</li><li><b>iOS Version Dependency:</b> Apple frequently updates its security protocols with new iOS versions, which may temporarily break compatibility with <i>libimobiledevice</i> tools until updates are released.</li></ul>


title: TRUST PROMPT
content:
When executing <b>idevicepair pair</b>, your iOS device will display a 'Trust This Computer?' prompt. It is absolutely essential to tap 'Trust' on your device for the pairing process to complete successfully. Failing to do so will result in a pairing error on the host.


title: UDID (UNIQUE DEVICE IDENTIFIER)
content:
The UDID is a unique 40-character alphanumeric string that identifies each iOS device. You can find your device's UDID using the <b>idevice_id -l</b> command. Specifying the UDID with the <b>-u</b> option is vital when you have multiple devices connected or want to ensure you're performing an action on a specific device.


title: PERSISTENT PAIRING RECORDS
content:
Once a device is successfully paired, the host stores a pairing record, typically in <i>~/.config/libimobiledevice/</i> or <i>/var/lib/lockdown/</i>. This record allows subsequent <i>libimobiledevice</i> commands to communicate with the device without requiring re-pairing, as long as the record remains valid on both the host and the device. These records are deleted by the <b>unpair</b> or <b>unpair-all</b> commands.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>idevicepair</i> is a core component of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began around 2007 to enable communication with Apple's iDevices on Linux and other non-Apple platforms. Its development has closely tracked the evolution of iOS, adapting to Apple's changes in USB communication protocols and security mechanisms over the years. It has been instrumental in providing a stable and reliable method for developers and users to interact with iOS devices, filling a critical gap left by Apple's lack of official Linux support.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show usage information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--udid</b> &lt;udid&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Target a specific device by its 40-digit device UDID. If omitted, the first connected device is used.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all installed provisioning profiles on the device, showing their UUIDs, names, and expiration dates.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--install</b> &lt;PROFILE&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Install a provisioning profile on the device. &lt;PROFILE&gt; must be the path to a <b>.mobileprovision</b> file.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--remove</b> &lt;UUID&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove a provisioning profile by its unique UUID. The UUID can be identified using the <b>--list</b> option.<br><br><b><b>-x</b>, <b>--xml</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output data in XML format. This option is particularly useful when combined with <b>--list</b> for programmatic parsing.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable debug output for troubleshooting verbose information.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ideviceprovision</i> is a powerful command-line utility belonging to the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source suite of tools designed to interact with Apple iOS devices natively on Linux, macOS, and Windows. This specific command empowers users to manage <b>provisioning profiles</b> and <b>signing identities</b> directly on a physically connected iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch.<br><br>It serves as an essential tool for iOS developers and testers who need to control the lifecycle of <b>.mobileprovision</b> files on their test devices. Users can leverage <i>ideviceprovision</i> to seamlessly install new profiles, list all currently installed profiles to inspect their details (like UUIDs, expiration dates, and associated device UDIDs), or efficiently remove outdated or unnecessary profiles, all without the need for Apple's proprietary Xcode environment. This functionality is particularly valuable for automating device setup in continuous integration/delivery pipelines or for managing devices in non-macOS development environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires a physical iOS device (iPhone, iPad, iPod touch) connected via USB to the host computer.<br>The iOS device must be unlocked and have 'trusted' the host computer (by responding to the 'Trust This Computer' prompt).<br>Primarily intended for developers and testers managing application development assets; not a typical end-user tool.<br>Provisioning profiles are device-specific and often time-limited; ensure the profile matches the device UDID and is not expired.<br>Potential need for appropriate USB device permissions on some Linux distributions for proper access.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ideviceprovision</i> is an integral part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source initiative that began around 2007. This project aims to provide a robust, cross-platform communication stack for Apple iOS devices on non-Apple operating systems (Linux, Windows, etc.) without relying on proprietary tools like iTunes or Xcode. The utility was developed to specifically address the need for command-line management of iOS developer assets, such as provisioning profiles, enabling automation and facilitating iOS development workflows outside of the macOS ecosystem.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>idevicesetlocation [OPTIONS] [-x &lt;latitude&gt;] [-y &lt;longitude&gt;]</code><br><code>idevicesetlocation [OPTIONS] --restore</code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><code>-u, --udid &lt;udid&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><br>Selects a specific device by its 40-character unique device identifier (UDID). If not specified, the command will operate on the first detected device.</i><br><br><b><code>-x, --latitude &lt;latitude&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><br>Sets the simulated latitude coordinate. Must be provided along with <code>--longitude</code> when setting a new location.</i><br><br><b><code>-y, --longitude &lt;longitude&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><br>Sets the simulated longitude coordinate. Must be provided along with <code>--latitude</code> when setting a new location.</i><br><br><b><code>--restore</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><br>Disables location simulation and restores the device's ability to report its actual geographic location through its internal GPS or other location services.</i><br><br><b><code>-h, --help</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><br>Displays a concise help message with command usage and available options.</i><br><br><b><code>-v, --version</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i><br>Prints the version information of the <code>idevicesetlocation</code> utility.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><br><code>idevicesetlocation</code> is a command-line utility from the <b>libimobiledevice</b> suite, designed to simulate a specific geographic location (latitude and longitude) on an Apple iOS device connected via USB. This tool is particularly useful for developers and testers who need to test location-based applications without physically moving to different geographical points. It allows for setting a precise virtual GPS coordinate, which the iOS device then reports as its current location. The simulation remains active until explicitly reset or the device is restarted. It leverages Apple's developer APIs to inject these virtual location data, making it a powerful tool for automated testing and debugging of apps that rely on GPS data. The command can also restore the device's actual location sensing by disabling the simulation, making it easy to switch between simulated and real-world scenarios.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><br>This command requires the iOS device to be in developer mode or have developer images mounted, as it utilizes internal Apple developer APIs for location simulation. The device must be unlocked for the command to execute successfully. The simulated location persists until the device is restarted or the <code>--restore</code> option is used. Not all iOS versions or device models may support this feature uniformly due to Apple's ongoing security and API changes.</i>


title: PREREQUISITES
content:
<i><br>For <code>idevicesetlocation</code> to function, <b>libimobiledevice</b> and its development headers must be installed on your system. Additionally, the iOS device must be connected via USB, trusted by the computer, and sometimes requires an active internet connection on the device to properly load map data for location services.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><br>The <code>idevicesetlocation</code> command is part of the <b>libimobiledevice</b> project, an independent, open-source initiative that began around 2007-2008. Its primary goal was to provide a cross-platform, free software library to communicate with Apple's iOS devices using native protocols. Prior to <b>libimobiledevice</b>, interacting with iOS devices programmatically often required Apple's proprietary SDKs, which were limited to macOS. <b>libimobiledevice</b> aimed to break this barrier, enabling Linux and Windows users to develop tools for iOS devices. <code>idevicesetlocation</code> was developed as a crucial utility within this ecosystem, specifically addressing the need for location testing in app development. Its development closely tracked changes in Apple's internal protocols and APIs, adapting to new iOS versions to maintain compatibility and functionality for simulating GPS coordinates, a common requirement for location-aware applications.</i>


title: SEE ALSO
content:
ideviceinfo(1), idevicescreenshot(1), idevicedebug(1), idevicediagnostics(1), idevicebackup2(1), idevicerestore(1)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --udid UDID</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the 40-character device UDID to connect to a specific device when multiple are connected.</i><br><br><b>-n, --network</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Connect to a network device instead of USB. Requires prior Wi-Fi pairing.</i><br><br><b>-s, --syslog-level LEVEL</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Filter logs by syslog level. Possible levels include: <b>debug</b>, <b>info</b>, <b>notice</b>, <b>warning</b>, <b>err</b>, <b>crit</b>, <b>alert</b>, <b>emerg</b>.</i><br><br><b>-p, --process PROCESS_NAME</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Filter logs to show only messages from a specific process name.</i><br><br><b>-k, --keyword KEYWORD</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Filter logs to show only messages containing a specific keyword.</i><br><br><b>-m, --monitor</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Continuously monitor and display new log entries. This is the default behavior.</i><br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Enable verbose debug output for the command itself.</i><br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Display the version information of the command.</i><br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Display the help message and exit.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idevicesyslog</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project. Its primary function is to retrieve and display system logs (syslog) in real-time from a connected Apple iOS device (iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch). It acts as a powerful diagnostic tool, allowing developers and system administrators to monitor device behavior, debug applications, and identify system-level issues by observing the stream of logs generated by the operating system and installed applications. The command supports filtering logs by device UDID, log level, process name, and keywords, providing flexibility for targeted log analysis. It is essential for troubleshooting and development workflows that involve iOS devices on Linux or macOS systems without Xcode.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires <i>libimobiledevice</i> and its dependencies to be installed.<br>The device must be unlocked and trusted by the host computer (pairing dialog accepted).<br>Logs are streamed in real-time; historical logs are not retrieved by default.<br>Filtering options like process name and keyword are applied on the client-side, meaning all logs are still transmitted to the host before filtering.


title: REAL-TIME STREAMING
content:
<i>idevicesyslog</i> excels at providing a live feed of system events, which is crucial for dynamic troubleshooting and observing immediate effects of actions on the device.


title: CROSS-PLATFORM COMPATIBILITY
content:
While primarily associated with Linux, <i>libimobiledevice</i> tools, including <i>idevicesyslog</i>, are also available on macOS and Windows, offering a consistent way to access device logs across different operating systems.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>idevicesyslog</i> is an integral part of the <i>libimobiledevice</i> project, an open-source software library that provides native protocol access to Apple's iOS devices. It was developed to enable communication with iPhones, iPads, and iPod Touches on Linux and other non-Apple platforms, bridging the gap for developers and users who need to interact with these devices outside of macOS and iTunes/Xcode environments. The command's functionality has been stable for many years, reflecting the robust nature of the underlying library's implementation of Apple's syslog protocol.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The <i>idmap_rfc2307</i> backend is configured in Samba's <b>smb.conf</b> file, typically within the <b>[global]</b> section, to define how SID-to-UID/GID mapping occurs for a specific ID range.<br><br><b>smb.conf</b> example:<br><br><b>[global]</b><br>  idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : backend = rfc2307<br>  idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : <I>OPTION</I> = <I>VALUE</I><br>  ...other LDAP-related options...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : backend = rfc2307</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies that the <i>rfc2307</i> backend should be used for the given ID range.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : rangesize = <I>NUM</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the size of the ID range that <i>winbindd</i> will use for allocating UIDs/GIDs from the LDAP server's pool. This affects performance and scalability.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : schema_mode = <I>MODE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Determines the LDAP schema variant to expect. Common modes include <b>rfc2307</b> (standard), <b>sfu</b> (Microsoft Services For Unix), or <b>ad</b> (Active Directory's native POSIX attributes).<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : ldap_server = <I>SERVER_LIST</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies one or more LDAP servers (IP addresses or hostnames) to connect to for identity lookups. Multiple servers can be listed separated by spaces.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : ldap_base_dn = <I>BASE_DN</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the base Distinguished Name (DN) from which LDAP searches for user and group objects will originate.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : ldap_user_dn = <I>BIND_DN</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The DN of the user account used to bind to the LDAP server. This user needs read permissions to the relevant identity attributes.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : ldap_password = <I>PASSWORD</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The password for the user specified by <b>ldap_user_dn</b>. It is recommended to use Kerberos authentication where possible instead of plain text passwords.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : ldap_realm = <I>REALM</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Kerberos realm to use when authenticating to the LDAP server, often required for Active Directory integration.<br><br><b>idmap config <I>RANGE</I> : ldap_url = <I>URL</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alternative way to specify LDAP server connection details, including protocol (ldap://, ldaps://), hostname, port, and base DN.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>idmap_rfc2307</i> is a Samba ID mapping backend that facilitates the translation of Windows Security Identifiers (SIDs) into Unix User IDs (UIDs) and Group IDs (GIDs), and vice versa. It achieves this by querying an external Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server, such as Microsoft Active Directory or OpenLDAP, which stores Unix-specific attributes following the RFC 2307 schema (or compatible schemas like Microsoft's Services for Unix (SFU) or Active Directory's POSIX attributes).<br><br>This backend is crucial for environments where Unix identities are managed within a central LDAP directory and need to be consistent across Windows and Unix systems accessing Samba shares. It relies on LDAP attributes like <b>uidNumber</b>, <b>gidNumber</b>, <b>unixHomeDirectory</b>, and <b>loginShell</b> to perform the mapping. <i>idmap_rfc2307</i> is configured within the <b>smb.conf</b> file and utilized by the <b>winbindd</b> daemon to provide identity resolution for Samba's file and print services, ensuring proper file system permissions and user experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Proper LDAP Configuration:</b> This backend strictly relies on a correctly configured LDAP server that contains the necessary RFC 2307-compliant or equivalent Unix attributes for users and groups. Misconfiguration of the LDAP schema or permissions will lead to mapping failures.<br><b>Performance:</b> Lookup performance is directly dependent on the LDAP server's responsiveness and network latency. Caching by <b>winbindd</b> helps mitigate this, but initial lookups can be slow.<br><b>Security:</b> If using <b>ldap_password</b>, ensure the <b>smb.conf</b> file's permissions are restricted. Kerberos authentication is generally preferred for security.<br><b>ID Range Management:</b> Overlapping ID ranges with other idmap backends or improperly sized ranges can cause conflicts or exhaust available IDs.


title: SCHEMA MODES EXPLAINED
content:
The <b>schema_mode</b> parameter is vital for <i>idmap_rfc2307</i>'s operation. Setting it to <b>rfc2307</b> expects standard attributes like <b>uidNumber</b> and <b>gidNumber</b> directly. <b>sfu</b> (Services For Unix) is for older Microsoft extensions, while <b>ad</b> is for Active Directory's native POSIX attributes. Choosing the correct mode ensures that <i>winbindd</i> correctly interprets the Unix identity information stored in your LDAP directory.


title: ID RANGE MANAGEMENT
content:
Defining distinct ID ranges (e.g., <b>idmap config YOURDOMAIN: range = 10000-20000</b>) is crucial when configuring ID mapping. Each domain or identity source should have its own non-overlapping range to prevent ID conflicts. The <b>rangesize</b> option influences how many IDs are cached by <i>winbindd</i>, impacting performance and the number of available IDs within the defined range.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>idmap_rfc2307</i> backend represents a significant evolution in Samba's ability to integrate with centralized identity management systems, particularly those based on LDAP and Active Directory. As organizations moved towards consolidating user information in directory services, Samba needed a robust method to map Windows SIDs to Unix UIDs/GIDs stored externally.<br><br>Initially, Samba's ID mapping relied more on internal databases (TDB) or simple RID mapping. However, with the widespread adoption of LDAP and RFC 2307 as a standard for storing Unix attributes in directories, the <i>rfc2307</i> backend was developed to leverage this external source of truth. Its development paralleled the increasing complexity of enterprise IT environments, where seamless cross-platform identity resolution became critical for large-scale Samba deployments and Active Directory domain membership.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-P</b>, <b>--push</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Action:</i> Instructs <b>idmapwb</b> to add or update a SID-to-UID/GID mapping in the internal database. This option requires specifying a SID and either a UID or GID to establish or modify the mapping.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--lookup</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Action:</i> Used to look up an existing SID-to-UID/GID mapping. When this option is used, you must provide either a SID or a UID/GID, and <b>idmapwb</b> will return its corresponding mapped identifier if found.<br><br><b><b>-D</b>, <b>--delete</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Action:</i> Removes a specified SID-to-UID/GID mapping from the database. This operation typically requires identifying the mapping to be removed, usually by providing the SID or the mapped UID/GID.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;SID&gt;</i>, <b>--sid=</b><i>&lt;SID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Argument:</i> Specifies the Windows Security Identifier (SID) that is involved in the mapping operation (e.g., for push, lookup, or delete actions). A SID uniquely identifies a user, group, or computer within a Windows domain.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>&lt;RID&gt;</i>, <b>--rid=</b><i>&lt;RID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Argument:</i> Specifies a Relative Identifier (RID). RIDs are typically used in conjunction with a domain SID to form a complete, unique SID for an account or group within that domain.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>&lt;UID&gt;</i>, <b>--uid=</b><i>&lt;UID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Argument:</i> Specifies the Unix User Identifier (UID) that is involved in the mapping operation, representing a local Unix user.<br><br><b><b>-g</b> <i>&lt;GID&gt;</i>, <b>--gid=</b><i>&lt;GID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Argument:</i> Specifies the Unix Group Identifier (GID) that is involved in the mapping operation, representing a local Unix group.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Option:</i> Increases the verbosity of the output. Using this option provides more detailed information about the operations being performed by <b>idmapwb</b>.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>&lt;level&gt;</i>, <b>--debuglevel=</b><i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Option:</i> Sets the debug level for the command's execution. A higher level (e.g., 10 for maximum detail) will produce more extensive debugging output, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-?</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Option:</i> Displays a concise help message about the command's usage and available options, then exits.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Option:</i> Prints the version information of the <b>idmapwb</b> utility and then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>idmapwb</b> is an internal helper utility for the <b>winbindd</b> daemon, which is a core component of the Samba suite. Its primary function is to manage the mapping between Windows Security Identifiers (SIDs) and local Unix User Identifiers (UIDs) or Group Identifiers (GIDs). This utility is specifically utilized by the <i>idmap_wb</i> backend to persist and retrieve these mappings within <b>winbindd</b>'s internal database.<br><br>While it can be invoked directly from the command line, <b>idmapwb</b> is not typically meant for routine administrator interaction. Instead, it is primarily called by <b>winbindd</b> itself to ensure consistent and persistent identity resolution in mixed Windows/Unix environments. It performs operations like adding, updating, looking up, and deleting SID-to-UID/GID mappings.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>idmapwb</b> is predominantly an internal utility of the Samba <b>winbindd</b> daemon and is rarely invoked directly by system administrators in typical operation. Incorrect direct usage, especially with the <b>--push</b> or <b>--delete</b> options, could potentially corrupt <b>winbindd</b>'s internal ID mapping database, leading to identity resolution issues and service disruption. Its functionality is dependent on a correctly running and configured <b>winbindd</b> process that uses the <i>idmap_wb</i> backend.


title: INTERNAL WINBINDD BACKEND
content:
The <i>idmap_wb</i> backend is a unique ID mapping method within Samba's <b>winbindd</b>. Unlike <i>idmap_tdb</i>, which uses a simple TDB file for storage, or <i>idmap_ad</i>, which queries Active Directory directly, <i>idmap_wb</i> leverages <b>winbindd</b>'s own internal database for storing and retrieving SID-to-UID/GID mappings. This approach can be particularly beneficial in configurations where <b>winbindd</b> is responsible for dynamically allocating and managing Unix IDs.


title: DATABASE MANAGEMENT
content:
<b>idmapwb</b> directly interacts with the internal database managed by <b>winbindd</b>. This database is where the critical associations between Windows SIDs and their corresponding Unix UIDs/GIDs are stored. While <b>idmapwb</b> offers command-line access to these functions, its primary role is to be called by <b>winbindd</b> itself whenever the daemon needs to create, retrieve, or update these mappings as part of its ongoing operation (e.g., when new users are authenticated or discovered from a Windows domain).


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>idmapwb</b> emerged as part of the ongoing development of Samba's <b>winbindd</b> daemon, specifically to provide a robust and persistent ID mapping solution for Windows SIDs to Unix UIDs/GIDs. As Samba evolved to support complex Active Directory environments, flexible and reliable ID mapping became crucial. The <i>idmap_wb</i> backend and its helper <b>idmapwb</b> were developed to use <b>winbindd</b>'s internal database for these mappings, offering a complementary alternative to other backends like <i>idmap_tdb</i> or <i>idmap_ad</i>, which store mappings differently or retrieve them from Active Directory itself. Its development is tied to the need for <b>winbindd</b> to autonomously manage ID allocations.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>idn</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... [<i>HOST</i>]<br><b>idn</b> {<i>--punycode-decode</i> | <i>--punycode-encode</i>} [<i>STRING</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a, --to-ascii</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts input domain names to their Punycode (ASCII) representation.<br><br><b>-d, --to-unicode</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts input domain names from Punycode (ASCII) to their Unicode representation.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows version information and exits.<br><br><b>-u, --us-ascii</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restricts input to only US-ASCII characters, returning an error for non-ASCII.<br><br><b>-N, --no-lookup</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats input as a literal domain name string without attempting DNS lookups.<br><br><b>--punycode-decode</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decodes the given string from Punycode to Unicode.<br><br><b>--punycode-encode</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Encodes the given string from Unicode to Punycode.<br><br><b>--idna2003</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the IDNA2003 standard for conversions. Note: Default may vary by library version.<br><br><b>--idna2008</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the IDNA2008 standard for conversions (often the default for modern versions).<br><br><b>--uts46</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the Unicode Technical Standard 46 (UTS46) standard for conversions (often the default for modern versions).<br><br><b>--validate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Validates the input according to the chosen IDNA standard without performing conversion.<br><br><b>--strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables strict validation checks, often used with --validate.<br><br><b>--nfkc</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies Unicode Normalization Form KC (NFKC) to the input before processing.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>idn</i> command is a powerful utility for handling Internationalized Domain Names (IDN). It primarily converts domain names between their standard Unicode representation and their ASCII Compatible Encoding (ACE), also known as Punycode. This conversion is crucial because the traditional Domain Name System (DNS) infrastructure is designed to handle only ASCII characters. IDN allows users to register and access domain names using characters from various languages and scripts (e.g., Arabic, Chinese, Cyrillic).<br><br><i>idn</i> supports both IDNA2003 and the newer IDNA2008/UTS46 standards, ensuring compatibility with modern internet standards. It's an essential tool for developers and administrators working with globalized web content, enabling them to process, validate, and convert domain names in a format suitable for DNS resolution while presenting them in a user-friendly, localized form.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The behavior of <i>idn</i> can differ slightly between <i>libidn</i> (older) and <i>libidn2</i> (newer) versions, particularly concerning the default IDNA standard (IDNA2003 vs. IDNA2008/UTS46). Users should be aware of which library their <i>idn</i> command is linked against to ensure consistent results, especially for edge cases or specific character sets. Proper handling of input character encoding (e.g., UTF-8) is also crucial.


title: PUNYCODE
content:
<i>Punycode</i> is a specific encoding syntax used to represent Unicode characters in the ASCII-compatible Domain Name System (DNS). It allows IDNs to be stored and processed by the existing DNS infrastructure while still being readable in their original scripts by applications.


title: IDNA STANDARDS (IDNA2003, IDNA2008, UTS46)
content:
These are different versions and specifications for how Internationalized Domain Names should be processed and converted. IDNA2003 was the first widely adopted standard. IDNA2008 and UTS46 (Unicode Technical Standard 46) are newer revisions that address security concerns, ambiguities, and offer more comprehensive character handling, ensuring greater interoperability and consistency across the internet.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of Internationalized Domain Names (IDN) was developed to allow people worldwide to use domain names in their native languages. The <i>idn</i> command emerged as part of the GNU Libidn project, providing a robust implementation of the IDNA (Internationalized Domain Names in Applications) standard. The initial standard, IDNA2003, was followed by IDNA2008 and UTS46, which addressed some limitations and ambiguities. The <i>libidn2</i> library, and thus newer versions of the <i>idn</i> command, provides support for these updated standards, reflecting ongoing efforts to make the internet more accessible globally.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command `<i>idnits</i>` does not appear to be a standard or commonly known utility in most Linux distributions. <br>Extensive searches in official documentation, package repositories, and common command-line tool databases across various Linux ecosystems (like Debian/Ubuntu, RHEL/CentOS, Fedora, Arch Linux) do not yield any results for a command specifically named `<i>idnits</i>` or any closely related variant with this exact spelling. <br><br> In the Linux environment, commands typically have man pages (manual pages) detailing their syntax, options, and usage, and are usually part of a standard package or a well-known open-source project. The absence of such documentation or presence in common software archives strongly suggests that `<i>idnits</i>` is not a pre-installed or widely distributed command-line tool. <br><br> It is highly probable that `<i>idnits</i>` is either a typographical error, a custom script or alias created by a user or administrator for a specific system, or a placeholder name for a hypothetical command. Without a defined purpose or implementation, analyzing its functionality, parameters, or typical use cases is not possible. Therefore, any attempt to execute `<i>idnits</i>` on a standard Linux system would most likely result in a 'command not found' error.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As `<i>idnits</i>` is not a recognized Linux command, attempting to execute it will likely result in a 'command not found' error. <br>Any descriptions or functionalities attributed to `<i>idnits</i>` would be purely speculative or erroneous, as there is no official definition or implementation. <br>Users should always verify the existence and purpose of a command before attempting to use it.


title: POTENTIAL TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
content:
Given the spelling, `<i>idnits</i>` could potentially be a misspelling or phonetic approximation of several existing Linux commands or concepts, including:<br><b>`init`</b> (the system initialization process, e.g., System V `init` or `systemd`)<br><b>`units`</b> (a GNU program for converting between different units)<br><b>`idn`</b> (Internationalized Domain Names related utilities)<br><b>`dnf`</b> (Dandified YUM, a package manager in Fedora/RHEL)<br>It is crucial to verify the correct spelling and purpose of any command before execution to avoid unexpected behavior or errors.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no known history or development for a standard Linux command named `<i>idnits</i>`. <br>Commands typically gain history through their inclusion in Unix-like operating systems, updates through open-source projects, and widespread adoption, none of which apply to `<i>idnits</i>`.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-p <port></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the 1394 OHCI port number.<br><br><b><i>-d <device_file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the 1394 character device file (e.g., <i>/dev/fw0</i>).<br><br><b><i>-i <input_plug_number></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the input plug number (IT_PLUG).<br><br><b><i>-o <output_plug_number></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output plug number (OT_PLUG).<br><br><b><i>-c <channel></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the ISOCHRONOUS channel number.<br><br><b><i>-t <transfer_rate></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the transfer rate (e.g., <b>100</b>, <b>200</b>, <b>400</b> Mbps).<br><br><b><i>-m <mode></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the operation mode. Valid modes are <b>source</b> or <b>sink</b>.<br><br><b><i>-v</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output.<br><br><b><i>-q</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable quiet output, only report values.<br><br><b><i>-h</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>iecset</i> is a command-line utility used to manage and query the data transfer parameters for IEC 61883-4 compliant devices connected via IEEE 1394 (FireWire). These devices often include digital camcorders, VCRs, and other audiovisual equipment that utilize FireWire for transferring MPEG2-TS (Transport Stream) data.<br><br>The command allows users to configure aspects like the data transfer channel, input/output plugs, transfer rate, and operational mode (source or sink). When run without arguments, <i>iecset</i> displays the current settings. When provided with options and values, it attempts to set those parameters on the specified FireWire device or port. This tool is fundamental for applications requiring direct control over FireWire video capture or playback streams.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>iecset</i> directly interacts with low-level FireWire drivers. Misconfiguration can lead to data transfer issues or a device not being recognized correctly by applications. It typically requires root privileges or appropriate group permissions to access <i>/dev/fw*</i> devices. This command is highly specific to IEEE 1394 (FireWire) devices and is not applicable to USB or other interface types.


title: USAGE SCENARIOS
content:
<i>iecset</i> can be used to query the current state of a FireWire device by running it without arguments, for example, <i>iecset -d /dev/fw0</i>. To set specific parameters, options are combined, such as <i>iecset -d /dev/fw0 -m source -c 63</i> to configure a device as a source on channel 63.


title: IEC 61883 STANDARD
content:
The IEC 61883 standard specifies the digital interface for consumer audio/video equipment, ensuring interoperability between devices from different manufacturers. Part 4 (IEC 61883-4) specifically deals with the transfer of MPEG-2 Transport Stream data over the IEEE 1394 interface. <i>iecset</i> directly manipulates parameters related to this standard.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>iecset</i> is part of the <i>libiec61883</i> library, which provides support for the IEC 61883 standard (digital interface for consumer audio/video equipment). This standard is primarily used over IEEE 1394 (FireWire). Development of <i>libiec61883</i> and associated tools like <i>iecset</i> has been driven by the need to interact with DV camcorders and other FireWire-based A/V equipment on Linux, especially in the early 2000s when FireWire was prevalent for video capture and digital archiving.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
iex [<i>options</i>] [<i>file</i>]<br>iex [<i>options</i>] --sname <i>&lt;node_name&gt;</i><br>iex [<i>options</i>] --name <i>&lt;node_name&gt;</i><br>iex [<i>options</i>] --remsh <i>&lt;node_name&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>[file]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an Elixir script file to load and execute before starting the shell. This is typically used for running one-off scripts or preloading modules.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the comprehensive help message for <b>iex</b>, listing all available options and their usage.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information for <b>iex</b> and the underlying Elixir distribution.<br><br><b><b>--sname</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the short node name for the Erlang VM, enabling distributed Elixir features like connecting to other nodes. This name is local to the machine.<br><br><b><b>--name</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the long node name for the Erlang VM, enabling distributed Elixir features across networks. This name typically includes the host.<br><br><b><b>--cookie</b> <i>&lt;cookie&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the Erlang distributed cookie, which must match among nodes for them to communicate securely in a distributed system.<br><br><b><b>--remsh</b> <i>&lt;node&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to a remote Elixir node identified by <i>&lt;node&gt;</i> (e.g., 'foo@localhost') and starts an interactive shell on that node.<br><br><b><b>--dot-iex</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative file to load instead of the default <b>~/.iex.exs</b> startup script when <b>iex</b> launches.<br><br><b><b>--no-halt</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the <b>iex</b> shell from automatically halting and exiting after a specified script or evaluation finishes execution.<br><br><b><b>--eval</b> <i>&lt;code_string&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Evaluates the given Elixir code string before starting the interactive shell. Useful for one-liner tasks or setup.<br><br><b><b>--require</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Requires and compiles the specified Elixir file or module before starting the shell, making its functions available.<br><br><b><b>--import</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Imports the specified Elixir file and makes its functions available directly in the current scope of the <b>iex</b> session.<br><br><b><b>--pa</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prepends the specified directory to the code path, allowing the Erlang VM to find and load modules from that location first.<br><br><b><b>--pz</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Appends the specified directory to the code path, allowing the Erlang VM to find and load modules from that location.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>iex</b> is the Interactive Elixir shell, a powerful Read-Eval-Print Loop (REPL) environment for the Elixir programming language. It allows developers to interactively execute Elixir code, test snippets, experiment with language features, and debug applications in real-time. Built on the Erlang VM (BEAM), <b>iex</b> provides access to Elixir's modules, functions, and processes, making it an indispensable tool for development, exploration, and introspection of Elixir projects. It can be used to run individual commands, start a Mix project's shell, or connect to a running Elixir node for distributed debugging.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>iex</b> is part of the Elixir programming language ecosystem and requires both Elixir and Erlang/OTP to be installed on the system. It is not a standalone operating system utility. While excellent for development and debugging, it's generally not intended for running long-lived production applications, which are typically compiled and deployed as releases. The state within an <b>iex</b> session is ephemeral and is lost once the session is terminated.


title: INTEGRATION WITH MIX
content:
When run within an Elixir project directory, <b>iex</b> is commonly invoked via <b>mix iex</b>. This command not only launches the <b>iex</b> shell but also loads the project's dependencies, compiles its source code, and sets up the application environment, making the project's modules and applications readily available within the interactive session.


title: REMOTE SHELL CAPABILITIES
content:
One of <b>iex</b>'s powerful features is its ability to connect to and interact with remote Elixir nodes running on the same or different machines. Using options like <b>--sname</b>, <b>--name</b>, and <b>--remsh</b>, developers can debug, inspect processes, and even manage running applications in a distributed environment, providing unparalleled insight into production systems.


title: CUSTOMIZATION
content:
Upon startup, <b>iex</b> automatically loads and executes the <b>~/.iex.exs</b> script (or a specified file with <b>--dot-iex</b>). This file can be used to define custom helper functions, set aliases, configure the environment, or perform any setup tasks, allowing developers to tailor their interactive Elixir experience and streamline their workflow.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>iex</b> has been a fundamental component of the Elixir programming language since its inception by José Valim in 2012. Designed to foster an interactive and exploratory development workflow, its presence highlights Elixir's commitment to developer experience. The functionality of <b>iex</b>, including its ability to connect to remote nodes and load project contexts, has evolved alongside the language, drawing inspiration from and improving upon interactive shells in other languages like Ruby's IRB and Python's IDLE.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>if</B> <I>command_list</I><br><B>then</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands_if_true</I><br><B>fi</B><br><br><B>if</B> <I>command_list</I><br><B>then</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands_if_true</I><br><B>else</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands_if_false</I><br><B>fi</B><br><br><B>if</B> <I>command_list_1</I><br><B>then</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands_if_true_1</I><br><B>elif</B> <I>command_list_2</I><br><B>then</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands_if_true_2</I><br><B>else</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands_if_false</I><br><B>fi</B>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>if</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiates a conditional block. It evaluates the exit status of the subsequent command list.<br><br><b>then</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the commands to be executed if the preceding <I>if</I> or <I>elif</I> condition evaluates to true (exit status 0).<br><br><b>else</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the commands to be executed if the preceding <I>if</I> or <I>elif</I> condition evaluates to false (non-zero exit status).<br><br><b>elif</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An 'else if' clause that introduces an additional condition to be tested if the previous <I>if</I> or <I>elif</I> condition was false.<br><br><b>fi</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Marks the end of an <I>if</I> block. All <I>if</I> statements must be terminated with <I>fi</I>.<br><br><b>command_list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more commands whose combined exit status determines the flow of the <I>if</I> statement. Typically, this includes <I>test</I> or <I>[</I> expressions.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>if</I> construct is a fundamental shell keyword used for conditional execution of commands within a shell script or on the command line.<br>It evaluates the exit status of a command or list of commands. If the exit status is zero (indicating success or true), the commands following <I>then</I> are executed. If the exit status is non-zero (indicating failure or false), the commands following <I>else</I> (if present) are executed.<br>The <I>if</I> statement supports various forms: a simple <I>if...then...fi</I> block, an <I>if...then...else...fi</I> block for alternative execution, and an <I>if...then...elif...else...fi</I> block for multiple conditions.<br>Conditions are typically evaluated using commands like <I>test</I> or the <I>[</I> (single bracket) and <I>[[</I> (double bracket) operators, which return an exit status based on their evaluation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <I>if</I> construct is a shell keyword, not an external command found in <I>/usr/bin</I>.<br>It relies solely on the <B>exit status</B> of the evaluated command: 0 for true (success) and any non-zero value for false (failure).<br>Proper indentation and newlines/semicolons are crucial for readability and correct parsing by the shell.<br>Always ensure the <I>if</I> block is correctly terminated with <I>fi</I>.


title: EXIT STATUS AND CONDITIONALS
content:
The <I>if</I> command evaluates the exit status of the command(s) immediately following it. An exit status of <B>0</B> indicates success or true, while any <B>non-zero</B> exit status indicates failure or false. This is a crucial concept in shell scripting, as many commands return specific exit codes to signify different outcomes.<br>Common conditional expressions use the <I>test</I> command or its shorthand <I>[</I> for basic tests (e.g., <I>-f file</I> for file existence, <I>-z string</I> for empty string, <I>num1 -eq num2</I> for numeric equality). More advanced shells like <I>bash</I> also provide <I>[[</I> for enhanced conditional expressions, supporting regular expressions and logical operators (<I>&&</I>, <I>||</I>) more directly.


title: ONE-LINER SYNTAX
content:
For simple <I>if</I> statements, the <I>then</I> keyword and the commands can be placed on the same line as <I>if</I> by separating them with a semicolon. Similarly, <I>else</I> and <I>fi</I> can follow on the same line.<br>Example: <I><B>if</B> <I>[ -f file.txt ]</I>; <B>then</B> <I>echo "File exists"</I>; <B>fi</B></I><br>This compact form is often used for quick checks on the command line.


title: LOGICAL OPERATORS
content:
While <I>if</I> is used for blocks, shell logical operators <I>&&</I> (AND) and <I>||</I> (OR) can achieve conditional execution in a more concise way for single commands.<br><I>command1 <B>&&</B> command2</I> (Execute <I>command2</I> only if <I>command1</I> succeeds)<br><I>command1 <B>||</B> command2</I> (Execute <I>command2</I> only if <I>command1</I> fails)<br>These are often used as alternatives to simple <I>if</I> statements for brevity.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>if</I> conditional construct has been a core component of Unix shells since the early days of the Bourne shell (<I>sh</I>). Its design was crucial for writing robust scripts that could adapt to different conditions and handle errors gracefully.<br>Modern shells like <I>bash</I>, <I>zsh</I>, and <I>ksh</I> have inherited and expanded upon this fundamental structure, though the core syntax and behavior remain consistent. It is universally available and a cornerstone of shell scripting.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ifdata</b> [ <i>-p</i> ] [ <i>-r</i> ] [ <i>-v</i> ] <i><interface></i> [ <i><type></i> ]<br><b>ifdata</b> [ <i>-p</i> ] [ <i>-r</i> ] [ <i>-v</i> ] <i>-a</i> [ <i><type></i> ]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i><interface></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the network interface to query (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>, <i>enp0s3</i>). This parameter is ignored if <i>-a</i> is used.<br><br><b><i><type></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific type of information to retrieve. Common types include <i>IP</i>, <i>NETMASK</i>, <i>BROADCAST</i>, <i>HWADDR</i>, <i>MTU</i>, <i>RX_PACKETS</i>, <i>TX_BYTES</i>, <i>FLAGS</i>, etc. If omitted, <i>IP</i> is often assumed or a default set of values is displayed.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(primary)</i> When an interface has multiple IP addresses, this option ensures only the first (primary) IP address found is printed.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(raw)</i> Prints the requested value without an accompanying newline character. This is highly useful for scripting where the output needs to be directly processed.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(verbose)</i> Prints the type name before the value. For example, <i>IP: 192.168.1.100</i> instead of just <i>192.168.1.100</i>.<br><br><b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(all)</i> Iterates through all active network interfaces and applies the query to each. When used, the <i><interface></i> parameter is ignored.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>ifdata</b> is a command-line utility from the <i>net-tools</i> package designed to retrieve specific configuration information about network interfaces. It allows users to quickly query data points such as IP address, netmask, hardware address (MAC), MTU, and various statistics like packet and byte counts for both received and transmitted traffic. Unlike <b>ifconfig</b> which displays a large block of information, <b>ifdata</b> focuses on extracting a single, specific piece of data, making it particularly useful for scripting and automated tasks where only a particular value is needed. While still functional, <b>ifdata</b> and the broader <i>net-tools</i> suite have largely been superseded by the <i>iproute2</i> utilities (specifically the <b>ip</b> command) in modern Linux distributions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>ifdata</b> is part of the <i>net-tools</i> package, which is considered deprecated on many modern Linux distributions in favor of the <i>iproute2</i> suite. Consequently, it might not be installed by default. Its functionality is largely superseded by the more versatile <b>ip</b> command (e.g., <b>ip addr show</b> or <b>ip -s link show</b>). Users on newer systems are generally encouraged to use <b>ip</b> for network configuration and query tasks.


title: COMMON DATA TYPES
content:
Some of the most frequently queried data types with <b>ifdata</b> include:<br><ul><li><i>IP</i>: IP address</li><li><i>NETMASK</i>: Network mask</li><li><i>BROADCAST</i>: Broadcast address</li><li><i>HWADDR</i>: Hardware address (MAC address)</li><li><i>MTU</i>: Maximum Transmission Unit</li><li><i>RX_PACKETS</i>: Number of received packets</li><li><i>TX_BYTES</i>: Number of transmitted bytes</li><li><i>FLAGS</i>: Interface flags (e.g., UP, BROADCAST, RUNNING)</li></ul>


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
To get the IP address of <i>eth0</i>:<br><b>ifdata eth0 IP</b><br><br>To get the MAC address of <i>wlan0</i> without a newline:<br><b>ifdata -r wlan0 HWADDR</b><br><br>To list the IP addresses of all active interfaces:<br><b>ifdata -a IP</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>ifdata</b> command originates from the <i>net-tools</i> package, which was the standard set of networking utilities for Linux and other Unix-like systems for many years. It provided a simpler, script-friendly way to extract specific network interface details compared to parsing the output of <b>ifconfig</b>. However, starting in the early 2000s, the <i>net-tools</i> suite began to be superseded by <i>iproute2</i>, which offers more advanced capabilities, better support for modern networking features (like multiple routing tables, namespaces, and VLANs), and a more consistent syntax. While <b>ifdata</b> remains functional, its development has largely ceased, and its usage has declined significantly in favor of the <b>ip</b> command.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>INTERFACE</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more network interfaces to bring down (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>).<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Bring down all interfaces configured in <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> that are currently up and have a 'down' stanza or are implicitly handled.<br><br><b><b>--allow=</b><i>CLASS</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Limit operations to interfaces belonging to a specific <i>CLASS</i> (e.g., <i>auto</i>, <i>hotplug</i>).<br><br><b><b>--exclude=</b><i>PATTERN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude interfaces matching <i>PATTERN</i> from being processed when <b>-a</b> is used.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force operations, ignoring errors or allowing actions normally prevented.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>FILE</i>, <b>--interfaces=</b><i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative interfaces configuration <i>FILE</i> instead of <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i>.<br><br><b><b>--ignore-errors</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Continue processing other interfaces even if one fails.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--no-act</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dry run; show what would be done without making actual changes.<br><br><b><b>--no-scripts</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not run any scripts defined in the interface configuration stanzas (e.g., pre-down, post-down).<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide detailed output of actions being performed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>ifdown</i> command is a critical utility within Linux networking, primarily used on systems leveraging the <i>ifupdown</i> package (common on Debian/Ubuntu-based distributions). Its core function is to logically deactivate specified network interfaces, effectively bringing them "down."<br><br>When invoked for a particular interface, <i>ifdown</i> reads its configuration from the <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> file. It then proceeds to remove any assigned IP addresses, delete associated routes, and execute any scripts defined in the interface's 'down', 'pre-down', or 'post-down' stanzas. This process ensures a clean shutdown of the network connection for that interface.<br><br>It's often used in conjunction with <b>ifup</b>, which performs the opposite action of activating an interface. <i>ifdown</i> requires root privileges to operate and is vital for managing network connectivity, troubleshooting, and applying network configuration changes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires superuser (root) privileges to execute.<br>Can disrupt network connectivity; use with caution on active interfaces.<br>Primarily used on Debian/Ubuntu-based systems and relies on the <i>ifupdown</i> package. Other distributions might use different network management tools (e.g., <b>ip</b>, <b>nmcli</b>, <b>netplan</b>).<br>Relies heavily on the configuration in <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i>.<br>May not fully clean up external network configurations not directly managed by <i>ifupdown</i>.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
The primary configuration for <b>ifdown</b> is found in <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i>. This file defines how each network interface should be handled, including details like IP addresses, netmasks, gateways, and the execution of pre/post scripts when interfaces are brought up or down.


title: PERMISSIONS
content:
<b>ifdown</b> requires superuser (root) privileges to execute, as it modifies system-level network configurations. Users typically run it with <b>sudo</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>ifupdown</b> suite, which includes <b>ifup</b> and <b>ifdown</b>, has been a cornerstone of network configuration on Debian-based Linux systems for decades. It provides a simple, script-driven approach to configure interfaces based on static files. While modern distributions and desktop environments increasingly adopt network management tools like NetworkManager or <b>systemd-networkd</b> for dynamic or complex setups, <b>ifupdown</b> remains widely used for server environments and static configurations due to its simplicity, reliability, and long-standing presence. Its development is tied to the broader <b>ifupdown</b> project, ensuring continued maintenance and compatibility for traditional use cases.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>interface</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the network interface for which the routing metric is to be set (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>).<br><br><b><i>metric</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An integer value representing the desired routing metric. <b>Lower values indicate a higher preference</b> for routes associated with this interface. Common values range from 0 to 65535.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ifmetric</i> is a utility used to set the routing metric for network interfaces on Linux systems.<br>The metric is a value associated with a route in the kernel's routing table, indicating its preference. A <b>lower metric</b> value signifies a more preferred route.<br>This command is particularly useful when multiple network interfaces on a system might provide a default route (e.g., a wired connection and a wireless connection).<br>By assigning different metrics, administrators can control which interface's default route is used by the system for outbound traffic.<br>For instance, if <i>eth0</i> has a metric of 100 and <i>wlan0</i> has a metric of 200, traffic will prefer the route via <i>eth0</i> if both offer a default route.<br><i>ifmetric</i> modifies existing routes or influences routes added subsequently by other network configuration tools (like DHCP clients) to ensure they are assigned the desired metric.<br>It operates by interacting with the kernel's routing subsystem, typically using <i>netlink</i> sockets, similar to <i>ip route</i>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ifmetric</i> typically adjusts the metric of routes that are already present or are added via the specified interface. It <b>does not create routes itself</b>.<br>It's often used in conjunction with DHCP clients (e.g., <i>dhclient</i>, <i>dhcpcd</i>) where it can be called from client hooks (like <i>/etc/dhcp/dhclient-exit-hooks.d/</i>).<br>Its functionality can largely be replicated and managed more granularly using the <b><i>ip route</i></b> command from the <i>iproute2</i> suite, which offers more comprehensive routing control.<br>The effectiveness depends on how the kernel's routing table is managed and how other network services interact with it.<br>Requires <b>root privileges</b> to execute.


title: PURPOSE IN DHCP SCRIPTS
content:
<i>ifmetric</i> is frequently utilized within DHCP client scripts or hooks. When a DHCP client obtains an IP address and default route, <i>ifmetric</i> can be invoked to set a specific metric for that interface's routes, ensuring its priority relative to other network connections. This allows for automated network failover or preference management.


title: REQUIRED PRIVILEGES
content:
Executing <i>ifmetric</i> requires superuser privileges (root). This is because it modifies the kernel's routing table, a system-wide networking configuration. Users typically run it with <b><i>sudo</i></b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ifmetric</i> is a relatively simple utility, often provided as a standalone package or within smaller network tool collections.<br>Its design addresses the specific need to easily adjust route metrics, especially in dynamic networking environments where interfaces might come up and down, and routes are automatically added.<br>While <b><i>ip route</i></b> provides similar and more powerful capabilities, <i>ifmetric</i> offers a more direct and concise way to handle the metric aspect specifically, making it convenient for scripting or simple configurations. It predates widespread <i>iproute2</i> adoption in many scripts.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>COMMAND</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The command to be executed conditionally.<br><br><b><i>ARGUMENT</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Arguments to be passed to the <i>COMMAND</i>.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute the command even if standard input is empty. This effectively negates the default behavior, running the command regardless of input.<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute the command and pass the content of standard input as arguments to the command, similar to <i>xargs</i>. This option implicitly forces the command to run if there is input, regardless of the <b>-n</b> option.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ifne</i> (short for "if not empty") is a utility from the <i>moreutils</i> package that provides a simple yet powerful way to conditionally execute a command. Its primary function is to read from its standard input (stdin) and then, based on whether stdin contains any data, decide whether to run the specified command. If stdin is <b>not</b> empty, the command is executed. If stdin is empty, the command is <b>not</b> executed.<br><br>This makes <i>ifne</i> particularly useful in shell scripting and pipelines where you want to avoid running a subsequent command unnecessarily or to prevent errors from commands that expect input but receive none. It effectively acts as a gatekeeper for commands in a pipeline. For instance, you might use it to send an email only if a log file contains specific error messages, or to process a list of files only if the list is non-empty.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ifne</i> reads its entire standard input into memory before deciding whether to execute the command. For extremely large inputs, this could potentially consume significant memory. It also means that the command isn't executed until all of its input has been received, which might not be suitable for streaming or very long-running processes where immediate processing of input is required.


title: HOW <I>IFNE</I> DIFFERS FROM <I>XARGS</I>
content:
While <i>ifne -x</i> can pass input as arguments like <i>xargs</i>, their primary purposes differ. <i>ifne</i>'s core function is <b>conditional execution</b>: it runs a command <b>only if</b> there's input. <i>xargs</i>, on the other hand, <b>always</b> attempts to execute a command, breaking down large inputs into multiple command invocations if necessary. <i>xargs</i> is about processing input in batches, whereas <i>ifne</i> is about making a single decision based on input presence.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ifne</i> is part of the <i>moreutils</i> package, a collection of small, useful Unix utilities that operate on lines. <i>moreutils</i> was created by Joey Hess, and its utilities are designed to fill common gaps in standard Unix tools, often by providing simple, single-purpose commands that can be easily combined in pipelines. <i>ifne</i> specifically addresses the common scripting need for conditional execution based on the presence of input.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ifquery</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>interface</i>]<br><b>ifquery</b> [<i>options</i>] {<b>--list</b> | <b>--all</b> | <b>--state</b> | <b>--syntax-check</b>}


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Query all interfaces defined in <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i>.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all configured interfaces.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--state</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the operational state (up or down) for the specified or all interfaces.<br><br><b><b>--allow-state</b> <i>STATE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only consider interfaces whose current state matches the specified <i>STATE</i> (e.g., 'up' or 'down').<br><br><b><b>--syntax-check</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a syntax check on the <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> file and report any errors.<br><br><b><b>-S</b> <i>FILE</i>, <b>--with-sources</b> <i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read configuration from the specified <i>FILE</i> instead of the default <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i>.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress actual operations; only show what would be done (less impactful for query commands).<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress normal output for successful operations.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide more detailed output.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ifquery</i> is a command-line utility used to inspect and report on the status and configuration of network interfaces defined in the <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> file. It is part of the <i>ifupdown</i> package, which traditionally manages network interface configuration on Debian-based Linux distributions.<br><br>Unlike <i>ifup</i> or <i>ifdown</i>, <i>ifquery</i> does not change the operational state of interfaces; instead, it provides information about their current status (up or down, according to the <i>ifupdown</i> system) and the properties assigned to them in the configuration file. It can be used to list all configured interfaces, check the state of specific interfaces, or even perform a syntax check on the interfaces configuration file.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ifquery</i>'s primary function is to report on the configuration managed by the <i>ifupdown</i> system. It does not provide real-time kernel interface status as tools like <b>ip link</b> do. Its utility is limited to systems that utilize <i>ifupdown</i> for network configuration; it will not be relevant for systems using alternative network management solutions like NetworkManager, Netplan, or systemd-networkd.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The primary configuration file that <i>ifquery</i> consults is <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i>. This file defines network interfaces, their addresses, and other networking parameters. It can also include other configuration files using the <b>source</b> or <b>source-directory</b> directives.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
<i>ifquery</i> exits with a status of 0 on success. A non-zero exit status indicates an error, such as a malformed configuration file when using <b>--syntax-check</b>, or an invalid interface name.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ifquery</i> is an integral part of the <i>ifupdown</i> package, which has been a foundational component for managing network interfaces on Debian and Ubuntu Linux distributions for many years. It provides a programmatic way to inquire about the state and configuration of interfaces managed by this traditional system, complementing the <b>ifup</b> and <b>ifdown</b> commands for activation and deactivation.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>interface</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the name of a particular network interface (e.g., `eth0`, `enp0s3`, `wlan0`) for which to display status. If omitted, the command typically displays status for all configured interfaces that it manages.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the status of all available network interfaces. This option is often used when no specific <i>interface</i> is provided.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--state</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs only the operational state of the interface(s) (e.g., `UP`, `DOWN`, `NO-CARRIER`), providing a concise summary.<br><br><b><b>-j</b>, <b>--json</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Formats the output as a JSON object, which is useful for programmatic parsing and integration with other scripts or applications.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides more detailed information about the interface(s), potentially including additional configuration parameters or diagnostic messages.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `ifstatus` command is a utility used to display the current operational status and configuration details of network interfaces on a Linux system. While not a standalone binary in all distributions, it is commonly provided as a script or function within various network management frameworks, such as <i>ifupdown</i>, <i>ifupdown2</i>, or as part of <i>systemd-networkd</i>'s <i>networkctl</i> utility. Its primary purpose is to offer a quick overview of network connectivity, including whether an interface is <b>UP</b> or <b>DOWN</b>, its assigned IP addresses (IPv4 and IPv6), MAC address, MTU, operational state, and sometimes even link speed and duplex settings. <br><br>Users frequently employ `ifstatus` to diagnose network issues, verify network configuration changes, or simply to get an instant snapshot of their system's network setup without sifting through verbose logs or complex configuration files. It acts as a convenient wrapper around lower-level networking tools like `ip` or `ifconfig`, presenting the information in a more readable and often summarized format tailored for quick diagnostics. The exact output and available options can vary significantly depending on the underlying network management system in use.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The `ifstatus` command is not universally standardized across all Linux distributions or network management systems. Its availability, exact syntax, supported options, and output format can vary significantly. Some systems might not provide `ifstatus` as a direct command, instead offering similar functionality through utilities like `networkctl status` (part of <i>systemd-networkd</i>) or `netplan status` (for <i>netplan</i>-configured systems). Users should consult their distribution's documentation or the `man` pages for their specific network configuration tools to understand the precise behavior of `ifstatus` on their system.


title: OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
The output of `ifstatus` typically appears in a human-readable, tabular, or list format, summarizing key details like interface name, state, IP address, and MAC address. <br><br>Modern implementations, particularly those from <i>ifupdown2</i> or similar frameworks, often provide an option (e.g., <b>-j</b> or <b>--json</b>) to output the status in a structured JSON format. This is highly beneficial for scripting and automation, allowing other programs to easily parse and utilize the network interface data. The exact information presented can vary based on the command's options and the underlying system's capabilities.


title: COMMON IMPLEMENTATIONS
content:
The `ifstatus` utility can be found as part of several distinct network management systems:<br><ul><li><i><b>ifupdown / ifupdown2</b></i>: Often provided as a script that queries the state of interfaces managed by the `interfaces(5)` file. `ifupdown2` offers a richer set of options, including JSON output.</li><li><i><b>systemd-networkd</b></i>: While not directly named `ifstatus`, the `networkctl status` command provides analogous functionality for interfaces configured via <i>systemd-networkd</i> unit files.</li><li><i><b>Netplan</b></i>: On systems using Netplan for network configuration, `netplan status` serves a similar purpose, displaying the current state of interfaces defined in Netplan YAML files.</li><li>In older or minimal setups, a simple `ifconfig` or `ip a` command might be the direct equivalent for status checks.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of easily checking network interface status dates back to early Unix-like systems with tools like `ifconfig`. As Linux networking evolved, particularly with the introduction of the <i>iproute2</i> suite, more robust methods for querying interface state became available via the `ip` command. The `ifstatus` command itself often emerged as a convenience wrapper or script, particularly within network management frameworks such as <i>ifupdown</i> and its successor <i>ifupdown2</i>. It aimed to provide a user-friendly interface that aggregates relevant status information in a single, easy-to-parse output, abstracting away the complexities of underlying tools. Its adoption grew as distributions sought more integrated and less fragmented ways to manage network configurations, leading to various implementations across different networking backends.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>iftop</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>interface</i>]<br>Example: <b>iftop</b> <i>-i eth0</i><br>Example: <b>iftop</b> <i>-nPp</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <interface></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>S</b>pecifies the network <i>interface</i> to listen on (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>).<br><br><b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>on't resolve hostnames, display IP addresses instead.<br><br><b>-P</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>isplay port numbers along with IP addresses.<br><br><b>-N</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>on't display port numbers.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>R</b>un in <i>promiscuous mode</i>, capturing all traffic on the network segment.<br><br><b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>on't display the bar graphs of traffic.<br><br><b>-B <units></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>isplay bandwidth in specified <i>units</i>: <i>k</i>, <i>M</i>, <i>G</i> (for Kbytes, Mbytes, Gbytes per second).<br><br><b>-F <net/mask></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>F</b>ilter traffic to only include packets to or from the specified <i>network</i>.<br><br><b>-f "filter code"</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>U</b>se a <i>pcap filter code</i> to select which packets are counted.<br><br><b>-s <seconds></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>isplay statistics for N <i>seconds</i> and then exit.<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>U</b>se a <i>text-only output</i>, without the ncurses interactive interface.<br><br><b>-L <num></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>D</b>isplay a maximum of <i>num</i> lines of traffic.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>iftop</b> is a powerful, console-based utility for <i>real-time network bandwidth monitoring</i>. It listens to network traffic on a specified interface (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>) and displays a continuously updated table of current bandwidth usage.<br><br>This allows administrators and users to quickly see which hosts are consuming the most bandwidth and the nature of their traffic. The display typically shows incoming and outgoing traffic for each host, along with cumulative averages over 2, 10, and 40 seconds. It can resolve hostnames, show port numbers, and filter traffic based on various criteria. Its interactive interface allows for dynamic sorting, toggling display options, and applying temporary filters, making it an invaluable tool for diagnosing network bottlenecks, identifying suspicious activity, or simply observing network flow.<br><br><b>iftop</b> uses <i>libpcap</i> to capture packets and <i>ncurses</i> for its interactive, textual user interface, providing a lightweight yet effective way to gain insight into network utilization directly from the command line.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires <b>root privileges</b> to capture network traffic on most systems.<br>Can be <b>CPU-intensive</b> on very high-traffic networks.<br>Primarily a <b>real-time monitoring</b> tool; it does not log historical data.


title: INTERACTIVE KEYS
content:
While <b>iftop</b> is running, several keys can be pressed to change its display or behavior:<br><ul><li><b>h</b> or <b>?</b>: <b>T</b>oggle <i>help display</i>.</li><li><b>n</b>: <b>T</b>oggle <i>hostname resolution</i> (display IP addresses).</li><li><b>p</b>: <b>T</b>oggle <i>port display</i>.</li><li><b>b</b>: <b>T</b>oggle <i>bandwidth bar</i> display.</li><li><b>B</b>: <b>T</b>oggle between <i>bits/bytes per second</i> display.</li><li><b>s</b>: <b>T</b>oggle <i>source host</i> column.</li><li><b>d</b>: <b>T</b>oggle <i>destination host</i> column.</li><li><b>S</b>: <b>S</b>ort by <i>source IP</i>.</li><li><b>D</b>: <b>S</b>ort by <i>destination IP</i>.</li><li><b>1</b>, <b>2</b>, <b>3</b>: <b>S</b>ort by <i>2s, 10s, or 40s average</i>.</li><li><b>q</b>: <b>Q</b>uit <b>iftop</b>.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>iftop</b> was developed as a command-line tool to provide a network bandwidth usage overview similar to how <b>top</b> provides a process usage overview. It leverages the <i>libpcap</i> library for packet capture and the <i>ncurses</i> library for its interactive, real-time display, making it a popular choice for quick network diagnostics on Unix-like systems.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ifup</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>interface</i><br><b>ifup</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>-a</b> | <b>--all</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>interface</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the network interface to bring up (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>).<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Bring up all interfaces marked <i>auto</i> in the <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> file.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>FILE</i>, <b>--interfaces=</b><i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative interfaces configuration file instead of the default.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show verbose output, detailing the commands being executed.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--no-act</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a dry run; do not actually execute any commands, just show what would be done.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force configuration even if the interface is already up or appears configured.<br><br><b><b>-X</b> <i>PATTERN</i>, <b>--exclude=</b><i>PATTERN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude interfaces matching the specified shell <i>PATTERN</i> from being brought up with <b>--all</b>.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information for <b>ifup</b>.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ifup</b> command activates a network interface based on its configuration defined in the <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> file. It is part of the <i>ifupdown</i> package, commonly found on Debian-based Linux distributions like Ubuntu. Unlike simple tools like <i>ip link set up</i>, <b>ifup</b> reads a declarative configuration file, automatically setting up IP addresses, netmasks, gateways, DNS servers, and executing pre-up/post-up scripts defined for the interface.<br><br>It handles complex network configurations such as DHCP, static IP assignments, bridges, bonds, and VLANs, bringing the interface completely online and ready for network communication. <b>ifup</b> ensures that all necessary dependencies and services are initiated or configured correctly for the specified interface to function. Its counterpart, <b>ifdown</b>, is used to deactivate and deconfigure an interface.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>ifup</b> is primarily used on Debian, Ubuntu, and their derivatives. Other Linux distributions often use different network management tools (e.g., <i>NetworkManager</i>, <i>systemd-networkd</i>, or legacy <i>ifcfg</i> scripts on RHEL/CentOS). It requires <i>root</i> privileges to execute and correctly apply network configurations. Misconfigurations in <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> can lead to network connectivity issues.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
<b>ifup</b> relies on the <i>/etc/network/interfaces</i> file for interface definitions. This file specifies how each network interface should be configured (e.g., DHCP, static IP, bridge, VLAN), including associated scripts and options.


title: PERMISSIONS
content:
Running <b>ifup</b> typically requires administrative (<i>root</i>) privileges due to its direct interaction with system network settings and kernel parameters.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>ifup</b> command, along with its counterpart <b>ifdown</b>, has been a foundational component of network management on Debian-based Linux systems for many years. It was developed as part of the <i>ifupdown</i> package, providing a robust, script-driven approach to configure network interfaces declaratively. Its design predates and offers an alternative to modern network managers like <i>NetworkManager</i> or <i>systemd-networkd</i>, remaining a preferred choice for server environments where consistent, file-based configuration is valued.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-u</b>, <b>--udid</b> <i>UDID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mounts the device with the specified <I>UDID</I> (Unique Device Identifier). This is particularly useful when multiple iOS devices are connected.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>OPTIONS</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes specific options directly to the <I>FUSE</I> filesystem. Common options include <b>allow_other</b> (permits other users to access the mount point) and <b>ro</b> (mounts the filesystem as read-only).<br><br><b><b>--root</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to mount the root filesystem of the device. This operation typically requires a jailbroken device or specialized access privileges.<br><br><b><b>--container</b> <i>APP_ID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mounts the data container (sandbox) of the application identified by its <I>APP_ID</I> (bundle identifier). This grants access to files and data specific to that application.<br><br><b><b>--documents</b> <i>APP_ID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mounts only the 'Documents' folder located within the data container of the specified application <I>APP_ID</I>. This is useful for accessing user-created content.<br><br><b><b>--app</b> <i>APP_ID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alias for <b>--container</b>, providing an alternative way to specify mounting an application's data sandbox.<br><br><b><b>--applications</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mounts the root directory that contains all user-installed applications (typically <i>/private/var/mobile/Applications</i> on the device). Note that individual app data remains sandboxed.<br><br><b><b>--list-apps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all installed applications on the connected device, showing their display names and corresponding bundle identifiers (<I>APP_ID</I>s). This option does not require a <I>MOUNT_POINT</I>.<br><br><b><b>--volume</b> <i>VOLUME_NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the volume name for the mounted filesystem. This name will be displayed in file managers and system utilities.<br><br><b><b>--icon</b> <i>ICON_FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a file path to an icon that will be used to represent the mounted filesystem in graphical file managers.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output, showing detailed information about the communication process. This is often useful for troubleshooting connectivity or access issues.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a comprehensive help message that includes usage instructions and a list of all available command-line options.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <i>ifuse</i> utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ifuse</i> is a powerful command-line utility that forms a core part of the <I>libimobiledevice</I> open-source project. Its primary function is to enable Linux users to seamlessly access and manage files on their Apple iOS devices, including iPhones, iPod Touches, and iPads, by mounting them as a <I>FUSE</I> (Filesystem in Userspace) filesystem.<br><br>By leveraging the <I>Apple File Conduit</I> (<I>AFC</I>) protocol, <I>ifuse</I> allows users to interact with various parts of the device's storage. This includes browsing and transferring media files like photos and videos, accessing documents within specific application sandboxes, or even mounting entire application containers. It provides a non-proprietary and efficient alternative to Apple's <I>iTunes</I> for file management on non-Apple operating systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ifuse</i> has several important considerations:<br> <i>1.</i> It relies heavily on the <I>libimobiledevice</I> library and the <I>usbmuxd</I> daemon. These core components must be correctly installed and running for <i>ifuse</i> to establish communication with the iOS device.<br> <i>2.</i> The iOS device must be unlocked, and the 'Trust This Computer?' prompt on the device must be accepted upon first connection to allow access.<br> <i>3.</i> Access is generally limited by iOS sandboxing. Full root filesystem access typically requires a jailbroken device or specialized device configurations.<br> <i>4.</i> Compatibility with the very latest iOS versions might sometimes lag behind, requiring updates to the underlying <I>libimobiledevice</I> components.<br> <i>5.</i> Attempting to write directly to certain system directories is generally not supported through <I>ifuse</I> and can lead to unexpected behavior or data corruption.


title: DEPENDENCIES AND SETUP
content:
<I>ifuse</I> fundamentally depends on the <I>libimobiledevice</I> library for its low-level communication with iOS devices and the <I>usbmuxd</I> (USB Multiplex Daemon) for managing the USB connection. Users must ensure these components are installed and that <I>usbmuxd</I> is running (it typically starts automatically on most Linux distributions) before attempting to use <I>ifuse</I>.<br><br>Upon connecting an iOS device for the first time to a new computer, the device will display a 'Trust This Computer?' prompt. This prompt <B>must</B> be accepted on the device for <I>ifuse</I> to establish a secure connection and mount the filesystem successfully.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ifuse</i> was developed as part of the open-source <I>libimobiledevice</I> project, which aimed to provide Linux and other non-Apple platforms with the ability to communicate with iOS devices without relying on <I>iTunes</I> or proprietary Apple software. Its development began in the late 2000s, fulfilling a critical need for users seeking to transfer files, manage backups, and interact with their iPhones, iPods, and iPads directly from their Linux machines. It stands as a significant community effort to bridge the gap between Apple's mobile ecosystem and the open-source world, offering a robust and free solution for iOS device management.


